8051 MICROCONTROLLER

For V semester EC/TC of VTU, Belagavi

As Per CBCS Scheme

Dr. ARUN KUMAR G

Associate Professor & HoD,
Department of ECE, JSS Academy of Technical Education, Noida, Uttar Pradesh.

Dr. NAGARAJA B G
Professor & HoD,
Department of ECE, Jain Institute of Technology, Davangere, Karnataka.

Dr. SPOORTI J JAINAR

Assistant Professor,
Department of ECE, JSS Academy of Technical Education, Noida, Uttar Pradesh.

Dr. PUROHIT SHRINIVASACHARYA

Associate Professor,
Department of ISE, Siddaganga Institute of Technology, Tumakuru, Karnataka.

Gouthami Publications
No. 101(3), Yashashwini Nilaya
2nd Cross, Basaveshwara Nagara,
Shimoga, Karnataka
8051 Microcontroller for V Sem. BE Students of VTU
written by, Dr. Arun Kumar G, Dr. Nagaraja B G, Dr. Spoorti J Jainar and Dr. Purohit Shrinivasacharya

Published by
Gouthami Publications
No. 101(3), Yashashwini Nilaya
2nd Cross, Basaveshwara Nagara,
Shimoga, Karnataka
Mobile: 9686799389
E-mail: [email protected]

©Publisher

First Edition - 2020

Price: ` 200.00

Copyright : Every effort has been made to avoid errors or omission in this publication. In spite of this, some errors
might have crept in. Any mistakes, error or discrepancy noted may be brought to our notice which shall be taken care
of in the next edition.
No part of this book may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means (graphic, electronic or me-
chanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information retrieval system) or reproduced on any disc, tape,
perforated media or other information storage device, etc., without the written permission of the publishers. Breach of
this condition is liable for legal action.
For binding mistakes, misprints or for missing pages, etc., the publisher’s liability is limited to replacement
within one month of purchase by a similar edition. All expenses in this connection are to be borne by the purchaser. All
disputes are subject to Shimoga jurisdiction only.
 Dedicated
To Almighty,
all our Family members,
Teachers
&
Friends
 Preface
The importance of microcontroller in this modern computing world is unbelievable as it plays a
very important role in each & every day-to-day application as majority of the products in the markets
have an inbuilt microcontroller for its operation. It is therefore necessary for any technical person of any
branch to know the basics of microprocessor & microcontroller as this is the era of computing. Thus,
it is a matter of great pleasure for us to write a text-book covering the entire syllabi for the V semester
engineering students of microcontrollers at the fundamental level.
The authors are immensely pleased to release the first edition of their book,
‘8051 Microcontroller’. The fundamental concepts of this book are presented in an easily understandable,
clear & systematic manner so that any student can understand the programming concepts and get through
his/her fundas. The book prepares very carefully as several background topics with essential illustrations
and practical examples and then further gives the complex programming concepts step by step and
also their explanations with the list of instruction sets and gives totally an exam oriented approach,
which will be very useful from the scoring point of view. This book covers the entire syllabus of ‘8051
Microcontroller’ for the V semester CBCS Scheme (Common to EC/TC) of VTU, Belagavi, Karnataka.
A large number of programming exercises along with their algorithms are also given, so that the students
can develope their own programs for any type of applications.
Five modules are present in this text-book & the topics that are covered are
Module -1: 8051 Microcontroller
Module -2: 8051 Instruction Set
Module -3: 8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming
Module -4: 8051 Timers and Serial Port
Module -5: 8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications
All the five modules are well addressed theoretically as well as problematically. A large number
of examination problems have been solved to substantiate the theoretical concepts. At the same time,
solutions to the examination question papers are also has been put up & thus the book seems to be giving
totally an examination oriented approach.
This book will be very much useful not only to the students of various engineering and polytechnic
colleges, but also to the teachers. The book also serves as a ready reckoner for some of the competitive

v
vi 8051 Microcontroller

exams. Suggestions for the improvement of this book are highly appreciated in this regard & are
welcomed.
Special Naman is due to His Holiness Sri Sri Shivarathrishwara Deshikendra Mahaswamiji,
President JSS Mahavidyapeetha Mysore and my sincere thanks to the Management of
JSS Mahavidyapeetha Mysore.
We also acknowledge all the help rendered by the personnels of JSS Academy of Technical
Education, Noida, Uttar Pradesh, Jain Institute of Technology, Davangere and Siddaganga Institute of
Technology, Tumakuru, for their constant support in bringing out this master piece for the V semester
CBCS Scheme (Common to E&CE/TC) of VTU, Belagavi, Karnataka.
Not but the least, we would like to thank all our family members for their infinite patience and
understanding they have demonstrated in allowing us to allocate family time for the writing of this book.
Finally, we are indebted to all the persons who have helped us in preparing this manuscript directly
or indirectly by giving us valuable suggestions & moral support, in the sense we wish to express our
profound thanks to all those people who have helped in making this book a reality.

October 2020 Authors

[email protected]
Cell: +91-8095382275
 Syllabus
Module 1: 8051 Microcontroller: Microprocessor Vs Microcontroller, Embedded Systems, Embedded
Microcontrollers, 8051 Architecture- Registers, Pin diagram, I/O ports functions, Internal
Memory organization. External Memory (ROM & RAM) interfacing.

Module 2: 8 051 Instruction Set: Addressing Modes, Data Transfer instructions, Arithmetic instructions,
Logical instructions, Branch instructions, Bit manipulation instructions. Simple Assembly
language program examples (without loops) to use these instructions.

Module 3: 8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming: 8051 Stack, Stack and Subroutine
instructions. Assembly language program examples on subroutine and involving loops -
Delay subroutine, Factorial of an 8 bit number (result maximum 8 bit), Block move without
overlap, Addition of N 8 bit numbers, Picking smallest/largest of N 8 bit numbers, Interfacing
simple switch and LED to I/O ports to switch on/off LED with respect to switch status.

Module 4: 8051 Timers and Serial Port: 8051 Timers and Counters – Operation and Assembly
language programming to generate a pulse using Mode-1 and a square wave using Mode-2
on a port pin.

8 051 Serial Communication- Basics of Serial Data Communication, RS-232 standard, 9 pin
RS232 signals, Simple Serial Port programming in Assembly and C to transmit a message
and to receive data serially.

Module 5: 8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications: 8051 Interrupts. 8051 Assembly language
programming to generate an external interrupt using a switch, 8051 C programming to
generate a square waveform on a port pin using a Timer interrupt.

I nterfacing 8051 to ADC-0804, LCD and Stepper motor and their 8051 Assembly language
interfacing programming.

*****

vii
 Contents
Module 1 8051 Microcontroller
1.1 Introduction to Microprocessor & Microcontrollers 1
1.1.1 Microprocessor 1
1.1.2 Evolution of Microprocessors 2
1.1.3 Microcontrollers 2
1.2 Microprocessor V/s Microcontroller 3
1.2.1 RISC and CISC 4
1.2.2 Harvard and Von Neumann architectures 5
1.2.3 Selection of Microcontrollers 6
1.3 Embedded Systems 7
1.4 Embedded Microcontrollers 7
1.5 8051 Architecture - Registers 7
1.5.1 Variants of MCS-51 family and their features 12
1.5.2 Applications of Microcontrollers 12
1.5.3 Special Function Register (SFR) 13
1.5.4 Features of 8051 Microcontroller 14
1.6 8051 pin details 15
1.7 I/O ports functions 18
1.7.1 PORT 0 19
1.7.2 PORT 1 20
1.7.3 PORT 2 21
1.7.4 PORT 3 21

ix
x 8051 Microcontroller

1.8 Memory Organization 22

1.9 External Memory (ROM & RAM) interfacing 27
1.9.1 Interfacing External Data 27
1.9.2 Interfacing External ROM 28

Module 2 8051 Instruction Set

2.1 Introduction 38
2.1.1 Low-Level Language (Machine language or Machine code) 39
2.1.2 Middle-Level Languages (Assembly language) 39
2.1.3 High-Level Languages 40
2.1.4 8051 Data Type 41
2.1.5 Assembler Directives 41
2.2 8051 Addressing Modes 43
2.3 Structure of Assembly Language 46

2.4 Instruction Set 46

Module 3 8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming

3.1 Stack 88
3.1.1 Pushing into stack 88
3.1.2 Popping from stack 90
3.2 Jump and Call Instructions 91
3.2.1 Compare Relative range, Absolute range and Long range 94
3.3 Subroutine 94
3.3.1 Call and the stack 94
3.4 Assembly language program examples on subroutine and involving loops
Delay subroutine Counters 95
Appendix 112

Module 4 8051 Timers and Serial Port

4.1 Introduction 140
4.1.1 Timer 0 register 140
4.1.2 Timer 1 register 141
Contents xi

4.2 TMOD (Timer Mode) Register 141

4.2.1 TCON Register (Timer Control Register) 145
4.3 Timer Modes 147
4.3.1 Timer in Mode1 147
4.3.2 Timer in Mode 2 149
4.4 Counter Mode 150
4.4.1 Counter 0 in Mode1 151
4.4.2 Counter 1 in Mode 1 152
FORMULAE 154
4.5 Serial Communication 169
4.6 SCON (serial control) register 171
4.6.1 SBUF register 172
4.6.2 Programming the 8051 to transfer data serially 172
4.6.3 Importance of the TI flag 173
4.6.4 Programming the 8051 to receive data serially 173
4.6.5 Importance of the RI flag 174
4.6.6 RS 232 174
FORMULAE 176

Module 5 8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications

5.1 Introduction to Interrupts 191
5.1.1 Interrupt & Polling methods 191
5.1.2 Comparison between interrupt and polling method 191
5.1.3 Steps in executing an interrupt 192
5.1.4 Different types of interrupt 192
5.1.5 IE and IP registers 193
5.1.6 Interrupt Enable (IE) registers 193
5.1.7 Interrupt Priority 194
5.1.8 Priority Setting 195
5.1.9 Interrupt Priority (IP) Register 195
5.1.9 8051 Interrupt Numbers 197
xii 8051 Microcontroller

5.1.10 Enabling or disabling of Interrupts. 200

5.2 ADC0804 (Analog to Digital Converter) 215
5.2.1 Introduction 215
5.2.2 Pin diagram of ADC0804 216
5.2.3 Timing diagram for data conversion by ADC0804 chip 217
5.3 LCD Interfacing 220
5.3.1 Introduction 220
5.3.2 LCD Pins 220
5.3.3 LCD Commands 221
5.3.4 LCD Timing for READ 222
5.3.5 LCD Timing for WRITE 222
5.4 Stepper Motor 231
5.4.1 Introduction 231
5.4.2 Stepper motor controller 234

8051 Programs 249

 1
8051 Microcontroller

1.1 Introduction to Microprocessor & Microcontrollers

1.1.1 Microprocessor
Data Bus

CPU

RAM ROM I/O Timer Serial

General Port COM
Purpose Port
Microprocessor

Address Bus

Fig. 1.1.1: Block diagram of Microprocessor.

• The microprocessor mainly contains CPU and general purpose registers. It does
not have built-in RAM, ROM, I/O ports etc., on the chip.
• The microprocessors are commonly referred to as general-purpose
microprocessor.
Examples:
Intel: 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium etc.
Motorola: 68000, 68010, 68020, 68030 etc.
Note: The microprocessor is the heart of microcomputer.

1
2 8051 Microcontroller

1.1.2 Evolution of Microprocessors

• In 1971, Intel produced 4004, 4-bit microprocessor. The 4004 was a 4-bit device
intended to be used with some other devices in making a calculator.
• In 1972, Intel came out with the 8008 which was capable of doing a function
with 8-bit words.
• In 1974, Intel announced the 8080, which had a much larger instruction set
than the 8008. The 8080 is referred to as a second generation microprocessor.
• After Intel produce the 8080, Motorola came out with the MC6800- 8-bit general
purpose CPU and it required only a +5V supply rather than the -5V.
• The Intel produced the 8085 microprocessor with general purpose CPU which
gives most or all of the computing power of earlier minicomputers.
• In 1978 Intel came out with the 8086 which is a full 16-bit processor. Intel 8086
was certainly the highest performance single-chip 16-bit microprocessor when
it was first introduced.
• Soon after 8086, Motorola introduced the 16-bit MC68000. The 8086 and the
MC68000 work directly with 16-bit words instead of 8-bit words.
• In 1979, Intel 8088.the first microprocessor to make a real splash in the market
was introduced, and the evolution has continued, the PC market moved from
8088 to 80286, 80386 and 80486, Pentium, Pentium II, Pentium III, and
Pentium 4.
Pentium 4 is about 5,000 times faster than 8088.
Note: Intel makes all these microprocessors and all of them are improvements of
design base of the 8088.

1.1.3 Microcontrollers

CPU RAM ROM

Serial
I/O Timer COM
Port

Fig. 1.1.2: Block diagram of Microcontroller.

• A microcontroller is a single integrated circuit which is dedicated to perform one
task and execute one specific application.
8051 Microcontroller 3

• Microcontroller has a CPU (a microprocessor) and in addition it has built-in

RAM, ROM, Input/output devices, Timers/Counters on a single chip.
Examples: 8051, 8052, ARM processor etc.
Note:

Fig. 1.1.3: Shows applications of microcontroller

1.2 Microprocessor V/s Microcontroller

Sl.No Microprocessor Microcontroller

1 Data Bus

CPU
General CPU RAM ROM
RAM ROM I/O Timer Serial
Purpose Port COM
Port Serial
Micro
I/O Timer COM
- processor
Address Bus Port

Fig.1.2.1 Block diagram of Fig.1.2.2 Block diagram of

microprocessor microcontroller

2 It contains only CPU. The RAM, Microcontroller has a CPU (a

ROM, Input/output devices, timers & microprocessor) and in addition
counters are separately interfaced. it has built-in RAM, ROM, Input/
output devices, Timers/Counters on
a single chip.

3 Designers decide the amount of Fixed amount of on-chip ROM, RAM

ROM, RAM and Input /output ports and Input /output ports etc.
etc.
4 It has many instructions to move It has one or two instructions to
data between memory & CPU. move data between memory & CPU.
4 8051 Microcontroller

5 It has one or two bit handling It has many bit handling

instructions. instructions.
Ex: CLR C, SETB P1.0 etc.
6 It has single memory for data & It has separate memory for data &
program. program.
7 Access time for memory & I/o devices Less access time for built – in memory
are more. & I/o devices.
8 Large number of instruction set. Limited number of instruction set.

9 Few pins are multifunctioned. More number of pins are

multifunctioned.
10 Very few bit handling instructions Many bit handling instructions

11 Design is very flexible Design is less flexible

12 Versatile. Not versatile.

13 High cost Low cost

14 General-purpose applications. Single-purpose applications in which

cost, space & power are critical.
15 Examples: Examples:
Intel: 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, 8051, 8052, ARM processor, PIC
Pentium etc. controllers etc.
Motorola: 68000, 68010, 68020,
68030 etc.

1.2.1 RISC and CISC

Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC)
• The Reduced Instruction Set Computer is a type of microprocessor architecture
that utilizes a small, highly-optimized set of instructions, rather than a more
specialized set of instructions often found in other types of architectures.
• A simplified instruction set provides higher performance when combined with
microprocessor architecture capable of executing those instructions using fewer
microprocessor cycles per instruction.

Complex Instruction Set Computer (CISC)

• The Complex Instruction Set Computer architecture is a type of microprocessor
design containing a large set of computer instructions that range from very
simple to very complex and specialized.
8051 Microcontroller 5

• In CISC architecture, single instruction can execute several low-level operations

such as a load from memory, an arithmetic operation, and a memory store or
capable of multi-step operations or addressing modes within single instruction.

Difference between RISC and CISC processors

™™ Compare the features of RISC and CISC
Sl. No. RISC CISC
1 Only few instructions. Many instructions.
2 Highly pipelined. Not pipelined or Less pipelined.
Instruction executed by the Instruction interpreted by the micro
3
hardware. program.
Simple instructions taking one Complex instructions taking
4
cycle. multiple cycles.
5 Multiple register set. Single register set.
Very few instructions refer memory. Most of instructions may refer
6
memory.
7 Fixed length instructions. Variable length instructions.
8 Complexity is in the compiler. Complexity is in the micro-program.
9 Few addressing modes. Many addressing modes.
Only Load/Store instructions access Many instructions can access
10
memory memory.
Coding in RISC processor requires Coding in CISC processor is simple
11 more number of lines. i.e. program size is small
i.e. program size is large
12 It has multi-clock. It has single-clock.
Examples: PIC Microcontroller series Examples: INTEL 80286, 80386
13
etc. etc.

1.2.2   Harvard and Von Neumann architectures

Von Neumann architectures

Data
Data and
Address
CPU Program
Control Memory

Fig. 1.2.3: Block diagram of Von Neumann architectures

6 8051 Microcontroller

• It is also referred to as Princeton architecture.

• Von Neumann architecture has single memory storage to hold both program
instructions and data.
• The CPU can either read an instruction or data from the memory one at a time
or write data to memory because instructions and data are accessed using same
bus system.
• The advantage of Von Neumann architecture is simple design of microcontroller
chip because only one memory is to be implemented which in turn reduces
required hardware.
• The disadvantage is slower execution of program.

Harvard
Data Data
Data Program
Memory Address Address Memory
CPU
Control Control
(RAM) (ROM)

Fig. 1.2.4: Block diagram of Harvard architecture

• Harvard architecture has physically separate memory storage to hold program
instructions and data i.e. separate program and data space.
• Since it has separate buses to access program and data memory, it is possible
to access program memory and data memory simultaneously.
• The advantage of a Harvard architecture microcontroller is that it is faster for a
given circuit complexity because it offers greater amount of parallelism.
• The disadvantage is that it requires more hardware, because two sets of buses
and memory blocks are required.

1.2.3   Selection of Microcontrollers

™™  ist the points to be considered during the selection of a microcontroller for
L
an application.
The three criteria in choosing microcontrollers are as follows:
1. Microcontroller must perform the required task efficiently & cost effectively i.e.
ff Speed
ff Amount of RAM & ROM on chip
ff Power consumption
ff The number of input pins & the timer on the chip
ff Cost per unit
ff Easy to upgrade
8051 Microcontroller 7

ff P
 ackaging (The number of pins & the packaging format. This determines
the required space & assembly layout.)
2. Availability of assembler, debuggers, complier, emulator, technical support and
expertise both in-house and outside.
3. Microcontroller availability in needed quantities both now and in the future.

1.3 Embedded Systems

An embedded system uses microprocessors or microcontrollers with software embedded
in it to do one task only.
Example: A printer performs one task only.

1.4 Embedded Microcontrollers

A microcontroller can be considered as a system with a processor, memory and
peripheralsand can be used as an embedded system.
The majority of microcontrollers in use today are embedded in other
machinery, such as automobiles, telephones, home appliances, and peripheralsfor
computersystems.

1.5 8051 Architecture - Registers

Central processing unit (CPU):

• The 8051 Central processing unit consists of 8-bit arithmetic & Logic unit (ALU),
Registers: A, B, PSW, SP, 16 bit program counter & “Data pointer registers”
(DPTR).
• The ALU can perform arithmetic functions on 8-bit data i.e. addition, subtraction,
multiplication & division.
• Similarly, the logic unit perform logical operations such as AND, OR, NOT etc.

Register
Registers are used to store information temporarily, while the information could be
• a byte of data to be processed, or
• an address pointing to the data to be fetched
Majority of 8051 register are 8-bit registers. The most widely used registers are
• Accumulator (A), for all arithmetic and logic instructions.
• B, R0, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7.
• DPTR (data pointer) and PC (Program Counter).
8 8051 Microcontroller

Arithmetic Special
Function i/o
and Logic

Port 0
PSW

Latch
Registers A0-A7
unit D0-D7
RAM
8-bit Data and
A B Address Bus

Port 1
Latch
i/o

DPTR
PC DPH ROM

Port 2
Latch
DPL i/o
A8-A15
16-bit Address Bus

i/o
Interrupt

Port 3
Latch
System Special Counter
EA Byte/Bit Serial Data
ALE timing Function
PSEN Address RD-WR
Registers
XTAL1 System IE
XTAL2 Register
Interrupts IP
RSET Bank 3
timers PCON
VCC Register SBUF
Data Buffers
GND Bank 2 SCON
Memory
TCON
Control Register
TMOD
Bank 1 TLO
Register THO
TL1
Bank 0 TH1
Internal RAM Structure

Fig.1.5.1: Detailed block diagram of 8051 Microcontroller

A register (Accumulator):
• Accumulator is a 8 bit register & is widely used for arithmetic and data transfer
operations.
• The arithmetic operations are addition, subtraction, multiplication, division &
Boolean bit manipulating etc.
• The data transfer operation between the 8051 microcontroller and any external
memory.
Note: It can be accessed through its SFR address of 0E0H.
8051 Microcontroller 9

B-register:
• B-register to store 8-bit result of multiplication & division operations
• It is used as temporary register where data may be stored.
Note: It can be accessed through its SFR address 0F0H.

BUS:
Bus is a collection of wires which work as a communication channel or medium for
transfer of data. The 8051 has two types of buses:
1. Address Bus (16-bits) and   2. Data Bus (8-bits)
Program Counter (PC):
• PC is a16-bit register which points to the address of the next instruction to be
executed.
• The PC is automatically incremented after every instruction byte is fetched.
• PC is the only register that does not have an internal address.
• When 8051 is RESET, the default value of PC is 0000 H.

Input-Output ports (I/O Ports):

• The 8051 has 4 Input/output ports i.e. PORT 0, PORT 1, PORT 2 and PORT 3
and each port has 8 Input/output pins.
• It has total 32 Input/output pins and each pin can be configured as input or
output pin.

Times & Counters

T0 T1

TH0 TL0 TH1 TL1

8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit

Fig.1.5.2: Timer 0 & Timer 1

The 8051 has two 16-bit timers/counters, they can be used either as
• Timers to generate a time delay or as
• Event counters to count events happening outside the microcontroller.
The two timers are
i) Timer/Counter T0 and
ii) Timer/Counter T1
10 8051 Microcontroller

• Each register can be used either as Timer or counter and can be divided into
two 8-bit registers called Timer Low (TL) and Timer High (TH).

STACK (8-bit)
• The stack is a section of RAM used by the CPU to store information temporarily.
This information could be data or an address.
• The register used to access the stack is called the SP (stack pointer) register.
The stack pointer in 8051 is only 8 bits wide
• The storing of a CPU register in the stack is called a PUSH, and loading the
contents of the stack back into a CPU register is called a POP.

Data pointer (DPTR):

DPH DPL
83 h 82 h

8 bit 8 bit
Fig.1.5.3: DPTR
• DPTR is a 16-bit register, which holds a 16-bit address.
• DPTR can be split into 2 parts:
ff DPL: Data pointer Low byte having internal address 82h.
ff DPH: Data pointer high byte having internal address 83h.
• DPTR is very useful for string operations and look up table operations.

Memory Organization:
The 8051 microcontroller’s memory is divided into
1. Internal RAM – 128 bytes: Used for temporarily storing and keeping intermediate
results and variables.
2. ROM – 4K bytes: Used for permanent saving program being executed

Special Function Registers (SFR):

The operations of 8051 are done by a group of specific internal registers, each called
a special function Register (SFR).

Interrupts:
The 8051 Microcontroller has 6 interrupts:
–––– ––––
RESET, I NT0, I NT1, Timer 0,Timer 1 Serial Port (TI/RI)
8051 Microcontroller 11

Program status Word (PSW) or Flag register:

CY AC F0 RS1 RS0 OV - P

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Fig.1.5.4: Program Status Word.

• The program status word (PSW) register is an 8-bit register. It is also referred
to as the flag register. Only 6 bits are used by the 8051. The two unused bits
are user-definable flags.
• The Carry (CY), Auxiliary carry (AC), Overflow (OV) and Parity (P) are called
Conditional flags because these flags indicate some conditions after the
instruction is executed.
Carry Flag (CY):
After performing arithmetic & logic operation if there is a carryout from the MSB (D7
i.e. 7th- bit) then CY = 1, otherwise CY = 0

Auxiliary carry Flag (AC):

After performing arithmetic & logic operation if a carry from D3 to D4 bit then,
AC = 1, otherwise AC = 0.
FO: Available for user for general purpose
RS1 & RS0:These two bits are used to select Register Bank and are shown in
table 1.5.1.
Table 1.5.1: Register Bank Selector

RS1 RS0 Register Bank Address

0 0 Bank 0 00H-07H
0 1 Bank 1 08H-0FH
1 0 Bank 2 10H-17H
1 1 Bank 3 18H-1FH

Overflow Flag (OV):

OV flag is set to 1 if either of the following two conditions occurs:
i. There is a carry from D6 to D7, but no carry out of D7 (CY = 0).
ii. There is a carry out from D7 bit (CY = 1) but no carry from D6 to D7 bit.
Parity Flag (P):
Parity flag indicates the number of 1’s present in the accumulator.
i. If the number of 1’s in the accumulator is odd then P = 1.
ii. If the number of 1’s in the accumulator is even then P = 0.
12 8051 Microcontroller

1.5.1 Variants of MCS-51 family and their features

The variants of MCS-51 family are
1. 8051   2. 8052    3. 8751   4. 8752   5. 8031 and   6. 8032
MCS-51 family are

Feature 8051 8052 8751 8752 8031 8032

EPROM
On-Chip ROM 4K 8K 4k 8K 0K 0K
RAM (Bytes) 128 256 128 256 128 256
Timer 2 3 2 3 2 3
I/O Ports 4 4 4 4 2 2
Seral Port 1 1 1 1 1 1
Interrupt Sources 6 8 6 8 6 8

1.5.2 Applications of Microcontrollers

The applications of microcontroller are:

Home Appliances Office Automobiles

TVs, VCR, Camcorders, Telephones, Computers, Engine control, ABS, Air
Remote Controller, Video Security Systems, Fax bags, Transmission control,
games, Cellular phones, Machines, Copiers, Laser Climate Control, Keyless
Telephones, Paging, Camera, Printer, Color Printer etc. entry, Trip computer etc.
Answering machines, Musical
Instruments etc.

Example 1-1
 how the status of the CY, AC and P flag after the addition of 38H and
S
2FH in the following instructions.
MOV A, #38H
ADD A, #2FH ; after the addition A=67H, CY=0
Solution:
1 1 1
38 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
+ 2F + 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
67 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
CY = 0 since there is no carry beyond the D7 bit.
8051 Microcontroller 13

AC = 1 since there is a carry from the D3 to D4 bit.

P = 1 since the accumulator has an odd number of 1s (it has five 1s).

Example 1-2
Show the status of the CY, AC and P flag after the addition of 9CH and
64H in the following instructions.
MOV A, #9CH
ADD A, #64H ; after the addition A=00H, CY=1
Solution:
1 1 1 1 1 1
9C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
+ 64 + 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
1 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CY = 1 since there is a carry beyond the D7 bit

AC = 1 since there is a carry from the D3 to the D4 bit
P = 0 since the accumulator has an even number of 1s (it has zero 1s)

Example 1-3
 how the status of the CY, AC and P flag after the addition of 88H and
S
93H in the following instructions.
MOV A, #88H
ADD A, #93H ; after the addition A=1BH, CY=1
Solution:
1
88 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
+ 93 + 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 1B 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

CY = 1 since there is a carry beyond the D7 bit.

AC = 0 since there is no carry from the D3 to D4 bit.
P = 0 since the accumulator has an even number of 1s (it has four 1s).

1.5.3 Special Function Register (SFR)

 he functions of any 5 SFR can be explained i.e. Accumulator, PSW, B register, Ports,
T
Timers, DPTR etc.
14 8051 Microcontroller

F8h FFh
F0h B F7h
E8h EFh
E0h ACC E7h
D8h DFh
D0h PSW D7h
C8h CFh
C0h C7h
B8h IP BFh
B0h P3 B7h
A8h IE AFh
A0h P2 A7h
98h SCON SBUF 9Fh
90h P1 97h
88h TCON TMOD TL0 TL1 TH0 TH1 8Fh
80h PO SP DPL DPH PCON 87h

Fig.1.4.7: Special Function Register.

• The operations of 8051 are done by a group of specific internal registers; each
called a Special Function Register (SFR) and its address ranges from 80H to
FFH (80 bytes).
• There are 21 Special function registers (SFR) in 8051 micro controller and these
are Register A, Register B, PSW, PCON etc. and each of these registers are of
1 byte size. Some of these special function registers are bit addressable, while
some are byte addressable.

1.5.4 FEATURES OF 8051 MICROCONTROLLER

™™ List the features of 8051 microcontroller 5-Marks
The Feature of 8051 are as follows

1. 8-bit CPU.
2. 4 Kbytes Internal ROM (Program Memory).
3. 128 bytes Internal RAM (Data Memory).
4. It has four 8-bit ports (Port 0, 1, 2, & 3), total 32 input/output lines.
5. Two 16-bit timers (T0 & T1).
6. One Full duplex serial communication port (data Transmitter/ Receiver).
7. Six Interrupt sources.
8051 Microcontroller 15

8. 16-bit program counter (PC) & data pointer (DPTR).

9. 8-bit Stack pointer.

1.6 8051 pin details

The8051 microcontroller is a dual in-line pin packages has 40 pins, out of which
32 pins are assigned for Ports P0, P1, P2 and P4, where each ports takes 8 pins.
–– –––––
The rest of the pins are VCC, GND, XTAL1, XTAL2, RST, EA , ALE/ PROG
––––––
and PSE N.

P1.0 1 40 VCC

P1.1 2 39 P0.0 (AD0)

P1.2 3 38 P0.1 (AD1)

P1.3 4 37 P0.2 (AD2)

P1.4 5 36 P0.3 (AD3)
P1.5 6 35 P0.4 (AD4)
P1.6 7 34 P0.5 (AD5)
P1.7 8 33 P0.6 (AD6)
RST 9 32 P0.7 (AD7)
8051 ––
(RXD) P3.0 10 31 EA/VPP
40 Pin DIP ––––––
(TXD) P3.1 11 30 ALE/PROG
––– –––––
(INT0) P3.2 12 29 PSEN
–––
(INT1) P3.3 13 28 P2.7 (A15)
(T0) P3.4 14 27 P2.6 (A14)
(T1) P3.5 15 26 P2.5 (A13)
–––
(WR ) P3.6 16 25 P2.4 (A12)
–––
(RD) P3.7 17 24 P2.3 (A11)
XTAL2 18 23 P2.2 (A10)
XTAL1 19 22 P2.1 (A9)
GND 20 21 P2.0 (A8)

Fig. 1.6.1: Pin diagram of 8051 microcontroller

16 8051 Microcontroller

Pin No Pin Name Description

Port1 Port 1 is an 8-pin bi-directional Port. Each of these pins
1-8
(P1.0-P1.7) can be configured as either input or output pins.
• When a pulse (square wave) is applied to this pin,
microcontroller will terminate all its activities &
9 RST (Reset)
reset.
• Program counter is loaded with 0000.
Port 3 is an 8-pin bi-directional Port with dual function.
Port 3
10-17 Each of these pins can be configured as either input or
(P3.0-P3.7)
output pins.
• In 8051, the data is received from or transmitted to
RXD & TXD pins.
10-11 RXD & TXD • The data is transmitted out of 8051 through the
TXD line.
• The data is received by 8051 through the RXD line.
• The 8051 has two external hardware interrupts i.e.,
––– ––– Interrupt 0 & Interrupt 1. These two pins are used in
12-13 INT0 & INT1
Timers/Counter operation.
• These Pins are triggered by external circuits.
• The 8051 has two 16-bit Timers/ Counters. T0-Timer0
register (16-bit) T1-Timer1 register (16-bit).
• These can be used either as Timers to generate a
14-15 T0 & T1 time delay or as counters to count events happening
outside the microcontroller.
• Each 16-bit registers can be accessed as two separate
8-bit registers.
These are active low pins.
–––
• When RD =0, microcontroller reads the data from
––– –––
16-17 RD & WR external RAM.
–––
• When WR =0, microcontroller writes the data into
external RAM.
• The 8051 has an on-chip oscillator but requires an
external clock to run it.
XTAL2 &
18-19 • A Quartz crystal oscillator is connected to inputs
XTAL1
XTAL1 & XTAL2 with two capacitors having values
30Pf.
8051 Microcontroller 17

• If an external frequency (from AFO) has to be applied,

XTAL2 &
18-19 then it must be applied between XTAL1 & ground.
XTAL1
(continued) XTAL2 must be left open.
(continued)
• Oscillator frequency may vary from 4MHz to 40MHz.
20 VSS It is a ground pin i.e. VSS=0V
• Port 2 is an 8-pin bi-directional Port.
• If external memory is not used, these pins can be
Port 2
21-28 used as either input or output pins.
(P2.0-P2.7)
• If external memory is used then the higher address
i.e. A8-A15 will appear on this port.
––––––
–––––– • PSEN is an active low input to 8051.
PSEN ––––––
• PSEN is an output pin used to access the external
29 (program
program memory (ROM).This pin is connected to the
store Enable)
OE pin of the ROM.
• ALE is an output pin. It is used for demultiplexing
–––––– the address and the data bus.
ALE/ PROG
• When ALE=1, Port 0 is providing lower order address
(Address (A0-A7).
30
Latch
• When ALE=0, Port 0 is used as data lines (D0-D7).
Enable) ––––––
• This pin also has program pulse input PROG during
EEPROM programming.
• –––
––– EA is an active low input to 8051.
EA/ ––– –––
• When EA is connected to VCC i.e. EA =1, the 8051
VPP(External
can access 4 K bytes of internal ROM i.e. 0000 H to
Access
0FFF H and external ROM of 60 K bytes i.e. 1000 H
31 Enable/
to FFFF H.
Programming ––– –––
supply • When EA is connected to GND i.e. EA =0, then
voltage) all program fetches are directed to external ROM
i.e. 0000 H to FFFF H.

• Port 0 is an 8-pin bi-directional Port.

Port0 • Port 0 is also multiplexed low order address and data
32-39 (P0.0-P0.7) bus i.e. AD0-AD7.
• If external memory is not used, then these pins can
be used as either input or output pins.
18 8051 Microcontroller

• If external memory is used then the lower address

Port0
and data linesAD0-AD7 will appear on this port.
32-39 (P0.0-P0.7)
• When ALE=1, Port 0 is providing lower order address
(continued) (continued)
(A0-A7).
• When ALE=0, Port 0 is used as data lines (D0-D7).

40 VCC DC power supply +5V is connected to this pin.

1.7 I/O ports functions

P1.0 1 40 VCC
P1.1 2 39 P0.0 (AD0)
P1.2 3 38 P0.1 (AD1)
P1.3 4 37 P0.2 (AD2)
A total of 32
Port 1
P1.4 5 36 P0.3 (AD3)
pins are set
Port 0
P1.5 6 35 P0.4 (AD4) aside for the
P1.6 7 34 P0.5 (AD5) four ports P0,
P1.7 8 33 P0.6 (AD6) P1, P2, P3,
RST 9 32 P0.7 (AD7) where each
(RXD) P3.0 10 31 ––– port has 8 pins
EA/VPP
–––––
(TXD) P3.1 11 8051 30 ALE/PROG
–––– 12 29 ––––––
(INT0) P3.2 PSEN
––––
(INT1) P3.3 13 28 P2.7 (A15)
Port 3
(T0) P3.4 14 27 P2.6 (A14)
(T1) P3.5 15 26 P2.5 (A13)
––––
(WR ) P3.6 16 25 P2.4 (A12) Port 2
–––
(RD) P3.7 17 24 P2.3 (A11)
XTAL2 18 23 P2.2 (A10)
XTAL1 19 22 P2.1 (A9)
GND 20 21 P2.0 (A8)

Fig.1.7.1: Pin diagram of 8051 showing I/O ports

Features of I/O ports
• An 8051 microcontroller has four I/O ports P0, P1, P2 & P3, where each port
has 8 bits i.e. total 32 I/O pins which can be configures as input or output
ports.
• All the ports upon reset are configured as input, ready to use it as input port.
8051 Microcontroller 19

• To use any of these ports as an input port, it must be programmed by writing

1 to all the bits.
• To use any of these ports as an output port, it must be programmed by writing
0 to all the bits.
Examples: (Refer After reading instruction set)
i) Port 0 configured as output port
MOV A, #00H ; A=00H
MOV P0, A ; Make Port 0 as output port.
ii) Port 1 configured as input port
MOV A, #0FFH ; A=FFH
MOV P1, A ; Make Port 1 as input port.
iii) Port 2: P2.0 to P0.3 configured as input & P2.4 to P2.7 configured as
output port.
MOV A, #0F0H ; A=F0H
MOV P2, A ; Make P2.0 to P2.3 as output & P2.4 to P2.7 as input pins.
1.7.1 PORT 0 (Pins 32-39)
• Port 0 occupies a total of 8 pins.
• To use the pins of PORT 0 as both input and output port, each pin must be
connected externally to 10 KΩ pull-up resistors because P0 is an open drain.
• Upon reset, Port 0 is configured as input port.
VCC
10K

P0.0
P0.1
Port 0

P0.2
8051 P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7

Fig.1.7.2: Port 0 with 10 KΩ Pull-Up Resistors

• Port 0 is multiplexed address and data to save pins.

• Port 0 is also designated as AD0-AD7, allowing it to be used for both address
and data.
20 8051 Microcontroller

• When connecting an 8051 to an external memory, port 0 provides both address

and data.
• Port 0 provides the lower 8 bits address via A0 – A7

Example 1.4:(Refer After reading instruction set)

Write an Assembly Language Program (ALP) to toggle Port 0 continuously.

Solution:
The P0 is 1st loaded with 55H = 01010101 and its complement i.e. 10101010 = AAH
is given to P0 continuously.
BACK: MOV A, #55H
MOV P0, A
ACALL DELAY ; Delay routine not shown
MOV A, #0AAH
MOV P0, A
ACALL DELAY ; Delay routine not shown
SJMP BACK

Example 1.5: (Refer After reading instruction set)

Write an ALP to configure Port 0 first as an input port and then data is received from
P0 and sent to P1.
Solution:
MOV A, #0FFH ; A=FF hex
MOV P0, A ; make P0 an i/p port by writing it all 1s
BACK: MOV A, P0 ; get data from P0
MOV P1, A ; send it to port 1
SJMP BACK ; keep doing it

1.7.2 PORT 1(Pins 1-8)

• Port 1 occupies a total of 8 pins.
• Port 1 does not need any pull-up resistors since it already has pull-up resistors
internally.
• Upon reset, Port 1 is configured as input port.

Example 1.6: (Refer After reading instruction set)

Write an ALP to continuously send out to port 0 the alternating value 55H and
AAH.
8051 Microcontroller 21

Solution:
MOV A, #55H
BACK: MOV P1, A
ACALL DELAY
CPL A ; complement register A
SJMP BACK

Example 1.7: (Refer After reading instruction set)

Port 1 is configured first as an input port by writing 1s to it and then data is received
from that port and saved in R3 and R1.

Solution:
MOV A, #0FFH ; A=FF hex
MOV P1, A ; make P1 an input port by writing it all 1s
MOV A, P1 ; get data from P1
MOV R3, A ; save it to in register R3
ACALL DELAY ; wait
MOV A, P1 ; another data from P1
MOV R1, A ; save it to in register R1

1.7.3 PORT 2(Pins 21-28)

• Port 2 occupies a total of 8 pins.
• Port 2 does not need any pull-up resistors since it already has pull-up resistors
internally.
• Upon reset, Port 2 is configured as inputport.
• In many 8051-based system, P2 is used as simple I/O. Port 2 is also designated
as A8 - A15, indicating its dual function.

1.7.4 PORT 3(Pins 10-17)

• Port 3 occupies a total of 8 pins.
• Port 3 does not need any pull-up resistors since it already has pull-up resistors
internally.
• Upon reset, Port 3 is configured as input port.
• Port 3 has the additional functions of proving some extremely important signals
such as interrupts.
22 8051 Microcontroller

Table 1.7.1 PORT 3 Alternative Functions

P3 bit Pin No. Function Description
P3.0 10 RxD Receive data for serial port
P3.1 11 TxD Transmit data for serial port
–––––
P3.2 12 INT0 External interrupt 0
–––––
P3.3 13 INT1 External interrupt 1
P3.4 14 T0 Timer/counter 0
P3.5 15 T1 Timer/counter 1
––––
P3.6 16 WR External data memory write strobe
––––
P3.7 17 RD External data memory read strobe

Note: Table 1.7.2 RESET Values 0f 8051 ports

PORTS RESET Values
Binary Hex
P0 11111111 FF
P1 11111111 FF
P2 11111111 FF
P3 11111111 FF

1.8 Memory Organization

The 8051 microcontroller's memory is divided into
1. Data Memory (RAM) and
2. Program Memory (ROM).
• The Data Memory is used for temporarily storing data, keeping intermediate
results and variablesused during the operation of the microcontroller.
• The Program Memory is used for permanent saving program being executed.

Data Memory (RAM)

The Data memory is of two types:
1. Internal RAM and 2. External RAM.
1. Internal RAM
The internal data memory consists of 256 bytes; these are divided into two parts:
i)   Internal data RAM- 00H-FFH (128 bytes)
ii) Special function registers- 80H-FFH (128 bytes)
8051 Microcontroller 23

Internal data RAM

FF H
Special Function Registers
(128 Bytes)
80 H
7F H
Scratch Pad Memory
(80 Bytes)
30 H
2F H
Bit Addressable Area
(16 Bytes)
20 H
IF H
Bank 3
18 H
17 H
Bank 2
10 H
OF H
Bank 1
08 H
07 H R7
06 H R6
05 H R5
04 H R4
03 H R3
02 H R2 Bank 0
01 H R1
00 H R0

The Internal data RAM is divided into 3 parts:

1) Register banks or General purpose RAM, 2) Bit addressable area
3) Scratch pad area
Register banks or General purpose RAM
The section of the Register Banks and their addresses are given below.
RS1 RS0 Register Bank Address
0 0 0 00H-07H
0 1 1 08H-0FH
1 0 2 10H-17H
1 1 3 18H-1FH
24 8051 Microcontroller

• The 8051 microcontroller consists of four register banks: Bank 0, Bank 1,

Bank 2, Bank 3. Each register bank contains 8 registers of 1 byte. So total
32 register in register bank.
• To change the register bank we have to set values of PSW register bits RS0 and RS1.
• Only one register bank is in use at a time.
• When 8051 is RESET, by default register bank 0 is selected.
Note:
Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3
Hex Hex Hex Hex
07 R7 0F R7 17 R7 1F R7
06 R6 0E R6 16 R6 1E R6
05 R5 0D R5 15 R5 1D R5
04 R4 0C R4 14 R4 1C R4
03 R3 0B R3 13 R3 1B R3
02 R2 0A R2 12 R2 1A R2
01 R1 09 R1 11 R1 19 R1
00 RO 0S R0 10 R0 1S R0

Fig. 1.8.2: Register Banks

The detailed diagrams of Register Banks are shown in Fig. 1.8.2.
Bit addressable RAM

2F 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78
2E 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70
2D 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68
2C 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
2B 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58
2A 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50
29 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 '48
28 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 46
27 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38
26 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30
25 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28
Bit Address
24 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
23 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18
22 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
21 0F 0E 0D 0C 0B 0A 09 08
20 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Byte Address

Fig. 1.8.3: Bit addressable RAM

8051 Microcontroller 25

• The area of bit addressable RAM is usually used to store bit variables.
• The address range from 20h to 2Fh (16 bytes) is bit-addressable RAM. Each bit
can be accessed from 00H to 7FH.
• The total bit addressable location are 16 bytes x 8 bits = 128 bits.
• Each bit can be accessed from 00H to 7FH.
• The programming using bit addressable area saves wastage of memory.
Note: For example, Bit 0 of byte 20h has the bit address 0, and bit 7 of byte 2Fh
has the bit address 7Fh).

Scratch pad area

• The upper 80 bytes are scratch pad area which is used for general purpose
storing of data.
• The Scratch pad area is in the address range 30H to 7FH.
• The Scratch pad area can be used for stack memory.

Special function registers (SFR)

• The operations of 8051 are done by a group of specific internal registers; each
called a Special Function Register (SFR) and its address ranges from 80H to
FFH (80 bytes).

F8h FFh
F0h B F7h
E8h EFh
E0h ACC E7h
D8h DFh
D0h PSW D7h
C8h CFh
C0h C7h
B8h IP BFh
B0h P3 B7h
A8h IE AFh
A0h P2 A7h
98h SCON SBUF 9Fh
90h P1 97h
88h TCON TMOD TL0 TL1 TH0 TH1 8Fh
80h PO SP DPL DPH PCON 87h

Fig. 1.8.4: Special Function Register

26 8051 Microcontroller

• There are 21 Special function registers (SFR) in 8051 micro controller and these
are Register A, Register B, PSW, PCON etc. and each of these registers are of
1 byte size. Some of these special function registers are bit addressable, while
some are byte addressable.
• SFRs are used to control timers, counters, serial ports, I/O ports and
peripherals.

External RAM
FFFFH

External Data RAM

64 K Bytes

0000 H
Fig. 1.8.5: External RAM
• External data memory is 64 K Bytes read/write memory.
• The external data memory is indirectly accessed through a Data Pointer Register,
it is slower than access to internal data memory.

Program Memory
––– –––
EA = 1 EA = 0
FFFFH FFFFH
External
program
memory

1000H 64K bytes

External
0FFFH
Internal program
program memory
memory

0000H 0000H

Fig. 1.8.6: Program memory (ROM)

• The 8051 microcontroller has an on chip internal program ROM of 4K size and
if needed can add an external memory of size 60K maximum by interfacing
i.e. total 64K size memory.
8051 Microcontroller 27

––– –––
• The Program memory accessed through EA pin. The EA is an active low
input.
––– –––
• When EA is connected to VCC i.e. EA =1, the 8051 can access 4 K bytes of
internal ROM i.e. 0000H to 0FFFH and external ROM of 60 K bytes i.e. 1000H
to FFFFH.
––– –––
• When EA is connected to GND i.e., EA =0, then all program fetches are directed
to external ROM i.e. 0000H to FFFFH.
Pins of 8051 used for external memory interfacing and list their functions.
The pins which are used for external memory interfacing are:
––
–– –––– –––– –––– –––––– –––––
––
EA, R D, WR , OE , PS E N, & AL E
Refer pin details of 8051 to explain the functions of each pin.

1.9 External Memory (ROM & RAM) interfacing

1.9.1 Interfacing External Data

• To address up to 64 K Bytes of external data memory then the hardware should
be configured as shown in figure 1.6.1.
• The MOVX instruction is used to access the external data memory.
• The Port 0 outputs the low address (A0 to A7) while Port 2 outputs the high
address (A8 to A15).

D0
P0
D7
–––
EA +VCC RAM
L
A A0
T
C A7
8051 ALE
CLK H ADDR
P2 A8
A15
––– –––
P3 RD O E
––– –––
WR WR

Fig.1.9.1: Interfacing 8051 with External Data Memory

• The Port 0 is a multiplexed address/data bus. The LATCH is used to demultiplex
address and data bus. The LATCH will be enabled when ALE =1, so output of
LATCH has lower order address A0-A7 as shown in Fig 1.9.1.
28 8051 Microcontroller

––– ––––
• The RD & WR pins are used when a RAM has to be accessed.
–––
• When RD = 0, a data byte can be read from a RAM location.
––––
• When WR= 0, a data byte can be written into a RAM location.

1.9.2 Interfacing External ROM

D0
P0
D7
–––
EA L ROM/
8051 A A0 EPROM
T
C A7
ALE
H ADDR
P2 A8
A15

–––––– –––
PSEN OE

Fig.1.9.2: Interfacing 8051 with External Program Memory.

• To address up to 64 K Bytes of external Program memory then the hardware
should be configured as shown in figure 1.9.2.
• The Port 0 outputs the low address (A0 to A7) while Port 2 outputs the high
address (A8 to A15).
• The Port 0 is a multiplexed address/data bus. The LATCH is used to demultiplex
address and data bus. The LATCH will be enabled when ALE=1, so output of
LATCH has lower order address A0-A7 as shown in Fig 1.6.2.
• The MOVC instruction is used to get data from code space.
––– ––– –––
• The EA is an active low input pin. When EA is connected to GND i.e. EA =0,
then all program fetches are directed to external ROM i.e. 0000 H to FFFF H.
––––––––
• The P S EN is an active low pin used to access the external program memory
–––––––– –––
(ROM), P S EN pin is connected to the OE pin of the ROM chip.
––– ––––––––
• To access the program code, EA must be grounded then P S EN will go low to
enable the external ROM to place a byte of program code on the data bus.
8051 Microcontroller 29

Example 1.8:
Interface 4K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller

WR WR
RD OE
A15
A14
A13 CE
A12
Port 2 A11
A11
8 A10 A10 4K
A9 A9
0 A8 A8 RAM
ALE
5
AD7 A7
1 7
AD6 A6
AD5 4 A5
Port 0 AD4 3 A4
AD3 A3
AD2 7 A2
AD1 A1
3
AD0 A0

D0D1D2D3 D4 D5D6 D7

Fig.1.9.3: Interface 4K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller

30 8051 Microcontroller

Example 1.9:
Interface 4K ROM to 8051 Microcontroller

VCC

EA
PSEN CE
OE
A11 A11
A10 A10
8 4K
A9 A9
0 A8 A8 ROM
ALE
5
AD7 A7
1 7
AD6 A6
AD5 4 A5
Port 0 AD4 3 A4
AD3 A3
AD2 7 A2
AD1 A1
3
AD0 A0
5V
VSS
D0D1D2D3 D4 D5D6 D7

Fig.1.9.4:Interface 4K ROM to 8051 Microcontroller

8051 Microcontroller 31

Example 1.10:
Interface 8K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller
P3.7 RD
P3.6 WR
PSEN A15
A14 CE WE OE
P2.7 A13 A13
8 A12 A12
8Kx8
0 P2.0 A8
ALE G Data
5
P0.7 AD7 D Q A7 RAM
1
74LS373
P0.0 AD0 A0 A0
OC D7 D0

D7

D0
Fig.1.9.6: Interface 8K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller

Example 1.11:
Interface 8K ROM to 8051 Microcontroller
™™ Describe the method of interfacing 8K PROM to 8051 microcontroller 10-Marks

P3.7 VCC
EA RD
P3.6 WR
PSEN CE OE VPP

8 P2.7
A12 A12
0 P2.0 A8 A8 2864
(2764)
5 ALE G
8Kx8
1 P0.7 AD7 D Q A7
Program
74LS373 ROM
VCC P0.0 AD0 A0 A0
OC D7 D0
VSS

D7

D0
Fig.1.9.7a: Interface 8K ROM to 8051 Microcontroller
32 8051 Microcontroller

Interface 8K DATA ROM to 8051 Microcontroller

P3.7 VCC
RD
P3.6 WR A15
PSEN A14 CE OE VPP
A13
P2.7
8 A12 A12
8Kx8
0 P2.0 A8
ALE G Data
5
AD7 – A7 ROM
1 P0.7 DQ

74LS373
P0.0 AD0 A0 A0
OC D7 D0

D7

D0
Fig.1.9.7 b: Interface 8K DATA ROM to 8051 Microcontroller

Interface 8K of single external ROM for both CODE and DATA.

P3.7 RD VCC
EA
P3.6 WR
PSEN A15 OE VPP
P2.7 A13 A13
8 A12 A12 8Kx8
0 P2.0 A8 ROM
ALE G
5 Program/
P0.7 AD7 D Q A7 Data
1
74LS373
P0.0 AD0 A0 A0
OC D7 D0 CE

D7

D0
Fig.1.9.7 c: Interface 8K of single external ROM for both CODE and DATA
8051 Microcontroller 33

Example 1.12:
Interface 8K EPROM & 4K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller

VCC VCC

WR RD OE OE WE
PSEN CE
A15
A14
A13 CE
A12 A12 A12
Port 2 A11 A11
A11
8 A10 A10 8K A10 4K
A9 A9 A9
0 A8 A8 RAM/ A8 RAM
ALE EPROM
5
AD7 A7 A7
1 7
AD6 A6 A6
AD5 4 A5 A5
Port 0 AD4 A4 A4
3 A3 A3
AD3
AD2 7 A2 A2
AD1 A1 A1
AD0
3 A0 A0

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Fig.1.9.8: Interface 8K EPROM & 4K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller

34 8051 Microcontroller

Example 1.13:
Interface 16K EPROM & 8K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller.

VCC VCC

WR RD OE OE WE
EA CE
PSEN
A15
A14
CE
A13 A13
A12 A12 A12
Port 2 A11 A11
A11
8 A10 A10 16K A10 8K
A9 A9 A9
0 A8 A8 ROM/ A8 RAM
ALE EEPROM
5
AD7 A7 A7
1 7
AD6 A6 A6
AD5 4 A5 A5
Port 0 AD4 3 A4 A4
AD3 A3 A3
AD2 7 A2 A2
AD1 A1 A1
AD0
3 A0 A0

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Fig.1.9.9: Interface 16K EPROM & 8K RAM to 8051 Microcontroller.

8051 Microcontroller 35

Example 1.14:
Interfacing 8 Kbyte RAM and 8 Kbyte ROM to 8051 microcontroller.

VCC VCC

WR RD OE OE WE
PSEN CE
A15
A14
A13 CE
A12 A12 A12
Port 2 A11 A11
A11
8 A10 A10 8K A10 8K
A9 A9 A9
0 A8 A8 ROM A8 RAM
ALE
5
AD7 A7 A7
1 7
AD6 A6 A6
AD5 4 A5 A5
Port 0 AD4 A4 A4
3 A3 A3
AD3
AD2 7 A2 A2
AD1 A1 A1
AD0
3 A0 A0

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Fig.1.9.10: Interfacing 8 Kbyte RAM and ROM with 8051.

36 8051 Microcontroller

Example 1.15:
Interfacing 8 Kbyte RAM and 8 Kbyte ROM to 8051 microcontroller.

P3.7 RD VCC VCC

EA P3.6 WR
PSEN A15
OE VPP OE VPP
8 P2.7 A14 CE
CE
0 A12 A13 A12 A12
5 P2.0 8Kx8 8Kx8
A8
ALE G Data Program
1
P0.7 AD7 D Q A7 ROM ROM

P0.0 74LS373
AD0 A0 A0 A0
OC D7 D0 D7 D0

D7

D0
Fig.1.9.11: Interfacing 8 Kbyte RAM and ROM with 8051.

Example 1.16:
Interfacing 16 Kbyte DATA RAM, DATA ROM and PROM to 8051
microcontroller.
P3.7 RD
EA
P3.6 WR
PSEN
74LS138
P2.6 A14 A Y0
P2.7 B Y1 VCC VCC
A15
C Y2
G2B Y3
G2A G1
8051 CE WE OE OE OE
VCC CE CE
A13 A13 A13 A13

P2.0 A8 16Kx8 16Kx8 16Kx8

ALE G Data Data Program
AD7 A7 RAM ROM ROM
PD.7 D Q

PD.0 74LS373 A0 A0 A0
AD0 A0
OC D7 D0 D7 D0 D7 D0

Fig.1.9.12: Interfacing 16 Kbyte DATA RAM, DATA ROM and PROM to 8051
microcontroller.
8051 Microcontroller 37

Example 1.17:
Identify to which Memory Location (ML) the data is moved after the
execution of the following program segment
SETB RS1
CLR RS0
MOV R1,#25h
MOV R3,#65h 5-Marks
Solution.
• The figure below gives the details of the banks and their memory location (ML).
Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3
Hex Hex Hex Hex
07 R7 0F R7 17 R7 1F R7
06 R6 0E R6 16 R6 1E R6
05 R5 0D R5 15 R5 1D R5
04 R4 0C R4 14 R4 1C R4
03 R3 0B R3 13 R3 1B R3
02 R2 0A R2 12 R2 1A R2
01 R1 09 R1 11 R1 19 R1
00 R0 08 R0 10 R0 18 R0

• After execution of above code, Bank 2 is selected and is shown in below table.
RS1 RS0 Bank Selected Address
1 0 Bank 2 10H – 17H
• From above diagram it is clear that in Bank 2, R1 memory location is 11H and
R2 memory location is 12H.
Bank 2 Selected
Register Memory location
R1 11H
R2 12H
 2
8051 Instruction Set
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Computer languages are mainly classified into three types:
1. Low Level Languages   2. Middle Level Language   3. High Level Language

Computer Languages

Low level Language Middle level Language High level Language

(Machine Language) (Assembly Language)
Use 1's and & 0's to Use mnemonics to Similar to human
create instructions create instructions language
Ex: Binary Language Assembly Language Cobol, FORTRAN,
C, C++, JAVA

C = A + B;
C C++ java
High Level Language

ADD A, B Assembly Language

100100111 Machine Language

Hardware

Fig. 2.1.1: Computer Languages

38
8051 Instruction Set 39

2.1.1 Low-Level Language (Machine language or Machine code)

Features of Low-Level Language
• A machine language is sometimes referred to as machine code or object code.
• It is a system of instructions and data executed directly by a computer CPU.
• It is a collection of binary digits or bits that the computer reads and
interprets.
• It is the only language a computer is capable of understanding.
• It consists 0s and 1s.
• It is very difficult for human beings to understand this language.
Advantages:
1. It is fast and makes efficient use of computer
2. No translator required to translate the code i.e. directly understood by
computer.
Disadvantages:
1. All operation code (OPCODE) has to be remembered
2. All memory addresses have to be remembered.
3. Programming is time consuming.
4. It is difficult to find errors in a program written in the machine language.

2.1.2 Middle-Level Languages (Assembly language)

• Medium-level language serves as the bridge between machine understandable
machine level language and High Level language.
• Medium-level language is also known as intermediate programming language
and pseudo language.
• Medium-level language is mainly an output of the programming source code
written in a higher-level language.
• The source code of the medium-level language is not directly executable by the
CPU as it’s an intermediate step before being converted into machine code.
• In assembly language, one statement maps to one machine language
instruction.
• Applications: To do system programming for writing operation as well as
application programming.

Features of Assembly language (Middle-Level Languages)

• Assembly language programs need to be “assembled” for execution by the
computer.
40 8051 Microcontroller

• Each assembly language instruction is translated into one machine language

instruction
• Very efficient code
• Easy programming as compared to machine language
• Requires language translator (Assembler)
• Program execution is slow as compared to machine
• Detailed instruction set knowledge is required
• More error prone
• Difficulty in debugging program.

Advantages:
1. More standardize and easier than machine languages.
2. Operate efficiently.
3. Easy to debug programs.

Disadvantages:
1. Assembly language is defined for a specific machine and specific processor.
Therefore, programs are not portable to other computers.
2. Source programs tend to be large and difficult to follow.
3. Many instructions are required to achieve small tasks.
4. Easy for the computer to understand but are more difficult for the programmer
to write (Complex).
5. The program has to be translated into machine code in order to work.

2.1.3 High-Level Languages

• High level languages are computer languages that are closer to human
language (ENGLISH) and are designed to be used by the human operator or the
programmer.
• High-level language is a programming language in which a program is written
in much simpler programming context and is generally independent of the
computer’s hardware architecture i.e. the programmer does not have to be
concerned with all the registers of the CPU and the size of each registers etc.
• The source code is the code written by the programmer in the high level language.
It must use interpreter, compiler or translator to convert human understandable
program to computer readable code called machine code (objet code).
• In High Level language, one statement maps to one or more assembly language
statement.
• Examples: BASIC, PASCAL, C, C++, Java etc.
8051 Instruction Set 41

Advantages:
1. Easier to read, write and maintain.
2. High-Level languages make complex programming simpler.
3. Error ratio is less in high level language and debugging is easier.
4. Length of the program is also small compared with low-level language.
5. Many real time problems can be easily solved with high level language.
6. Portable ( can work across different CPU families and support a wide range of
data types)
Disadvantages:
1. Usually slower than lower-level languages (for example assembler is fastest than C).

Differentiate between high level and low level language.

Sl. No. High level language Low level language
1 Easily understood by humans Understood by computers
2 Uses English like words Difficult for humans to read and
understand
3 Easy to locate and identify errors It’s difficult to spot errors in the
code
4 Must translate before the computer No need of translator.
can understand it

2.1.4 8051 Data Type

• The 8051 microcontroller has only one data type. It is 8-bits, and the size of
each register is also 8 bits.
• The programmer has to break down data larger than 8 bits (1 Byte) to be
processed by the CPU.
• The data types used by the 8051 can be positive or negative.

2.1.5 Assembler Directives

• The assembler directives are the statements that direct the assembler what to
do during assembling.
• They reserve memory space for data, define constants, and tell assembler where
to assemble program in a memory.
• They are also referred as pseudo instructions statements as they are effective only
during the assembly of the program but they do not generate any machine code.
The 8051 has 4 assembler directives:
1. ORG (origin)   2. DB (Define data)   3. END   4. EQU (Equate)
42 8051 Microcontroller

ORG (origin)
• The ORG directive is used to indicate the beginning of the address.
• The number that comes after ORG can be either in hex or in decimal.
• If the number is not followed by H, it is decimal and the assembler will convert
it to hexadecimal.
• Some assemblers use “. ORG” (dot ORG) instead of “ORG” for the origin directive.
Example: ORG 1000H

DB (Define data)
• It is used to define the 8-bit data and most widely used data directive in the
assembler.
• When DB is used to define data, the numbers can be in decimal, binary, hex,
or ASCII formats. For decimal, the “D” after the decimal number is optional,
“B”for binary and “H” for hexadecimal.
• To indicate ASCII, simply place the characters in single quotes or double
quotes. The assembler will assign the ASCII code for the numbers or characters
automatically.
• The DB directive is the only directive that can be used to define ASCII strings larger
than two characters; therefore, it should be used for all ASCII data definitions.
Examples:
ORG 1000H
DATA1: DB 40 ;DECIMAL NUMBER
DATA2: DB 00100111B ; BINARY NUMBER
DATA3: DB 1Fh ;HEXADECIMAL NUMBER
DATA4:    DB “DIPLOMA” ;ASCII CHARACTER
DATA5:    DB “2016” ;ASCII NUMBER
END

EQU
• EQU is used to define a constant without occupying a memory location.
• The EQU directive does not set aside storage for a data item but associates a
constant value with a data label.
• When the label appears in the program, its constant value will be substituted
for the label.
• Assume that there is a constant used in many different places in the program,
and the programmer wants to change its value throughout. By the use of EQU,
one can change it once and the assembler will change all of its occurrences.
8051 Instruction Set 43

Example:
ORG 1000H
COUNT EQU 40H
MOV A,#COUNT ; COPY 40 INTO A
END
• EQU indicates to the assembler the end of the source (asm) file.
• The END directive is the last line of an 8051 program, meaning that in the
source code anything after the END directive is ignored by the assembler.
• Some assemblers use “. END” (“dot END”) instead of “END”.
Example:
ORG 1000H
COUNT EQU 40H
MOV A,#COUNT ; COPY 40 INTO A
END

2.2 8051 Addressing Modes

The CPU can access data in various ways. The data could be in a memory or in
register or it may be an immediate value (CONSTANT). The various ways of accessing
these data are called addressing mode.
There are 5 addressing modes in 8051

1. Immediate addressing mode

2. Register addressing mode
3. Direct addressing mode
4. Register indirect addressing mode
5. Indexed addressing mode.

Immediate addressing mode

• In Immediate addressing mode, the source operand is a constant. The immediate
data must be preceded by the hash sign, “#”.
• This addressing mode can load information into any registers, including 16-bit
DPTR register and 8051 ports.
Examples:
MOV R1,#50 ;load 50 into R1
MOV B,#50H ;load 50H into B
MOV A,#35H ;load 35H into A
MOV DPL,#66H
44 8051 Microcontroller

MOV DPH,#55H ;DPTR=5566H

MOV DPTR,#5566H ;DPTR=5566H
;This is the same as above
MOV DPTR,#69925 ;illegal Value because value is> 65535
;(FFFFH)
MOV P1,#35H ;load 35H into Port 1
Register addressing mode
• Register addressing mode uses registers to hold the data to be manipulated.
• The source and destination registers must match in size.
• The movement of data between Rn registers is not allowed.
Examples:
MOV A,R1 ;copy contents of R1 into A
MOV R3,A ;copy contents of A into R3
ADD A,R2 ;add contents of R2 to A
ADD A, R0 ;add contents of R0 to A
MOV R5,A ;save accumulator in R5
MOV DPTR,#F5ABH ;16-bit data F5ABH is moved to 16-bit register
MOV R7,DPL ;Lower byte of DPTR copied to R7
MOV R6,DPH ;Higher byte of DPTR copied to R7
MOV DPTR,A ;
will give an error because A=8 bit and DPTR=
16-bit
MOV R4,R7 ;is invalid
Direct addressing mode
• The entire 128 bytes of RAM can be accessed using direct addressing mode. The
RAM locations 30-7FH are most often used.
• The register bank locations are accessed by its address or by its register
names.
• In this instruction, address is given as a part of the instructions.
Examples:
MOV R1, 30H ;Save content of RAM location 30H in R1
MOV 50H, A ;Save content of A in RAM location 50H
MOV A,4 ;is same as copying R4 into A
MOV A,R4 ;copy R4 into A

NOTE:
• The “#” sign distinguishes between the immediate and direct addressing mode.
The absence of the “#” sign is the direct addressing mode.
8051 Instruction Set 45

Register indirect addressing mode

• In Register indirect addressing mode, a register is used to hold the address of
the data (as a pointer to the data).
• Only register R0 and R1 are used for this purpose. The R2 – R7 cannot be used
to hold the address of an operand located in RAM.
• When R0 and R1 hold the addresses of RAM locations, they must be preceded
by the “@” sign.
Examples:
MOV A, @R1 ;move contents of RAM whose address is held by R1 into A
MOV @R0, B ;move contents of B into RAM whose address is held by R0
MOV @R1, 04H ;move contents of 04H into RAM whose address is held
by R1
MOV 30H, @R1 ;move contents of RAM whose address is held by R1 into
RAM 30H
MOVC A,@A+DPTR ;the contents of A are added to the 16-bit register DPTR
to form the 16-bit address of the needed data.

Advantages
• The advantage is that it makes accessing data dynamic rather than static as in
direct addressing mode. Looping is not possible in direct addressing mode.
Limitations
• R0 and R1 are the only registers that can be used for pointers in register indirect
addressing mode Since R0 and R1 are 8 bits wide, their use is limited to access
any information in the internal RAM.
• The accessing of externally connected RAM or on-chip ROM need 16-bit pointer.
In such case, the DPTR register is used.
NOTE:
• Indexed addressing mode is widely used in accessing data elements of look-up
table entries located in the program ROM.

Indexed addressing mode

• Indexed addressing mode is widely used in accessing data elements of look-up
table entries located in the program ROM space.
• Only program memory can be accessed in the index addressing. Either the DPTR
or PC can be used as an index register.
Examples:
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
MOVC A,@A+PC
46 8051 Microcontroller

2.3 Structure of Assembly Language

An assembly language instruction consists of a mnemonic, followed by one or two
operands. An assembly language instruction consists of four fields:
[label:] mnemonic [operands] [;comment]
Example:
Again: MOV A, R0 ; Copy the content of R0 into A register
NOTE:
• Brackets indicate that a field is optional, and not all lines have them. Brackets
should not be typed in the instructions.

2.4 INSTRUCTION SET

• Based on the operations performed, the instruction set of 8051 are classified as
1. Arithmetic instructions
2. Logical instructions
3. Data transfer instructions
4 Boolean instructions
5. Program branching instructions.
• Each instruction has two parts: operation code and operands. The operands
may be one or more i.e. operation code operand 1, operand 2 & operand 3.
Example:
MOV A, B
• The following nomenclatures for register, data, address and variables are used
while write instructions.

Table 2.1.1: Nomenclatures for register, data, address and variables are used
while write instructions.

A Accumulator
B “B” register
C Carry bit
Rn Register R0 - R7 of the currently selected register bank
Direct 8-bit internal direct address for data. The data could be in lower 128
bytes of RAM (00 - 7FH) or it could be in the special function register
(80 - FFH).
@Ri 8-bit external or internal RAM address available in register R0 or R1.
This is used for indirect addressing mode.
8051 Instruction Set 47

#data8 Immediate 8-bit data available in the instruction.

#data16 Immediate 16-bit data available in the instruction.
Addr11 11-bit destination address for short absolute jump. Used by instructions
AJMP & ACALL. Jump range is 2 kbyte (one page).
Addr16 16-bit destination address for long call or long jump.
Rel 2’s complement 8-bit offset (one - byte) used for short jump (SJMP) and
all conditional jumps.
bit Directly addressed bit in internal RAM or SFR

Arithmetic Instructions
Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
ADD A, #data CY, OV & AC 2 1
Operation (A) (A) + 8-bit data
Description Adds the 8-bit immediate data with accumulator contents and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADD A, #04H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H A = 09H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ADD A, Rn CY, OV & AC 1 1
Operation (A) (A) + (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Adds the contents of register Rn with accumulator contents and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADD A, R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H & R1 = 04H A = 09H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ADD A, direct CY, OV & AC 2 1
Operation (A) (A) + (direct address) where direct is the address.
Description Adds the content of direct address with accumulator contents and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADD A, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H & 50H = 04H A = 09H
48 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ADD A, @Ri CY, OV & AC 1 1
Operation (A) (A) + ((Ri)) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1.
Description Adds the contents of indirect RAM address with accumulator
contents and result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADD A, @R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, R0 = 50H & 50H = 04H A = 09H i.e. A = (A) + (50H)

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ADDC A, #data CY, OV & AC 2 1
Operation (A) (A) + (C) + 8-bit data
Description Adds the 8-bit immediate data, the carry flag and the accumulator
contents, result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADDC A, #04H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, CY=0 A = 09H
A = 05H, CY=1 A = 0AH
Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
ADDC A, Rn CY, OV & AC 1 1
Operation (A) (A) + (C) + (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Adds the contents of register Rn, the carry flag and the accumulator
contents, result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADDC A, R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, CY=0 & R0 = 04H A = 09H
A = 05H, CY=1 & R0 = 04H A = 0AH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ADDC A, direct CY, OV & AC 2 1
Operation (A) (A) + (C) + (direct address)
Description Adds the contents of direct address, the carry flag and the
accumulator contents, result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADDC A, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, CY=0 & 50H = 04H A = 09H
A = 05H, CY=1 & 50H = 04H A = 0AH
8051 Instruction Set 49

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ADDC A, @Ri CY, OV & AC 1 1
Operation (A) (A) + (C) + ((Ri)) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1.
Description Adds the contents of direct address, the carry flag and the
accumulator contents, result is stored in accumulator.
Example ADDC A, @R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, CY=0, R1=50H & 50H = 04H A = 09H
A = 05H, CY=1, R1=50H & 50H = 04H A = 0AH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SUBB A,#data CY, OV & AC 2 1
Operation (A) (A) - #-bit data
Description Subtract the 8-bit immediate data with accumulator contents and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example SUBB A, #04H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H A = 01H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SUBB A, Rn CY, OV & AC 1 1
Operation (A) (A) - (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Subtract the contents of register Rn with accumulator contents and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example SUBB A, R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, R0 = 04H A = 01H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SUBB A, direct CY, OV & AC 2 1
Operation (A) (A) - (direct address)
Description Subtract the contents of direct address with accumulator contents
and result is stored in accumulator.
Example SUBB A, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, 50H = 04H A = 01H
50 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SUBB A, @Ri CY, OV & AC 1 1
Operation (A) (A) - ((Ri))
Description Subtract the contents of indirect RAM address with accumulator
contents and result is stored in accumulator.
Example SUBB A, @R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H, R1 = 50H & 50H = 04H A = 01H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

INC A NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) + 1
Description Increment the content of accumulator by 1.
Example INC A
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H A = 06H
Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
INC Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (Rn) (Rn) + 1
Description Increment the content of register Rn by 1.
Example INC R0
Before Execution After Execution
R0 = 05H R0 = 06H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

INC direct NONE 2 1
Operation (direct) (Direct) + 1
Description Increment the content of direct address by 1.
Example INC 50H
Before Execution After Execution
50H = 05H 50H = 06H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

INC @Ri NONE 1 1
Operation ((Ri)) ((Ri)) + 1
Description Increment the content of indirect RAM address by 1.
Example INC @R0
Before Execution After Execution
R0=50H, 50H = 05H 50H = 06H
8051 Instruction Set 51

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DEC A NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) - 1
Description Decrement the content of Accumulator by 1
Example DEC A
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H A = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DEC Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (Rn) (Rn) - 1
Description Decrement the content of register Rn by 1
Example DEC R0
Before Execution After Execution
R0 = 05H R0 = 04H
Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
DEC direct NONE 2 1
Operation (direct) (Direct) - 1
Description Decrement the content of direct address by 1
Example DEC 50H
Before Execution After Execution
50H = 05H 50H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DEC @Ri NONE 1 1
Operation ((Ri)) (((Ri)) - 1
Description Decrement the content of indirect address by 1
Example DEC @R0
Before Execution After Execution
R0=50H & 50H = 05H 50H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

INC DPTR NONE 1 2
Operation (DPTR) (DPTR) + 1
Description Increment the content of 16-bit register DPTR address by 1
Example INC DPTR
Before Execution After Execution
DPTR = 1255H i.e. DH =12H, DL = 55H DPTR = 1256H i.e. DH =12H, DL = 56H
52 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MUL AB CY & OV 1 4
Operation (B)15- 8 (A)7-0 A X B
Description Multiply the Contents of Accumulator with the contents of register B.
Lower byte of the result in Accumulator and higher byte of the
result in Register B.
Example MUL AB
Before Execution After Execution
A = 05H & B = 03H 0015H i.e. A = 15H & B = 00H
A = FFH & B = 02H 01FEH i.e. A = FEH & B = 01H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DIV AB CY 1 4
Operation Quotient in A & Remainder in B A/B
Description Divide the Contents of Accumulator with the contents of register B.
Quotient of the result is stored in Accumulator & remainder of
theresult is stored in Register B.
Example DIV AB
Before Execution After Execution
A = FBH (251d ) & B = 12H (18d) A = 0DH & B = 11H
Quotient = 0DH & Remainder = 11H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DAA CY & AC 1 1
Operation Decimal Adjustment Accumulator.
If (A)3-0> 9 or (AC) = 1
Then
Add +6 to (A)3-0
If (A)7-4> 9 or (CY) = 1
Then
Add +6 to (A)7-4
Description Decimal adjustment of the accumulator according to BCD code.
The data is adjusted in the following two possible cases
It adds 6 to the lower 4-bits of A if it is greater than 9 or if AC=1.
It adds 6 to the upper 4-bits of A if it is greater than 9 or if CY=1.
8051 Instruction Set 53

Example MOV A, #45H MOV A, #50H

ADD A, #15H ADD A, #45H
DAA DAA

Result: Result:
4 5 H 5 0 H
+ 1 5 H + 5 5 H

5 A H INVALID BCD A 5 H INVALID BCD

+ 6 After DAA + 6 After DAA
6 0 H Valid BCD 1 0 5 H Valid BCD

Flags
Mnemonics Byte Cycle Operation
Affected
ADD A, #data 2 1 (A) (A) + 8-bit data CY, OV & AC
ADD A, Rn 1 1 (A) (A) + (Rn) CY, OV & AC
ADD A, direct 2 1 (A) (A) + (direct address) CY, OV & AC
ADD A, @Ri 1 1 (A) (A) + ((Ri)) CY, OV & AC
ADDC A, #data 2 1 (B) (A) + (C) + 8-bit data CY, OV & AC
ADDC A, Rn 1 1 (B) (A) + (C) + (Rn) CY, OV & AC
ADDC A, direct 2 1 (A) (A) + (C) + (direct address) CY, OV & AC

ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADDC A, @Ri 1 1 (A) (A) + (C) + ((Ri)) CY, OV & AC
SUBB A,#data 2 1 (A) (A) - #-bit data CY, OV & AC
SUBB A, Rn 1 1 (A) (A) - (Rn) CY, OV & AC
SUBB A, direct 2 1 (A) (A) - (direct address) CY, OV & AC
SUBB A, @Ri 1 1 (A) (A) - ((Ri)) NONE
INC A 1 1 (A) (A) + 1 NONE
INC Rn 1 1 (Rn) (Rn) + 1 NONE
INC direct 2 1 (direct) (direct) + 1 NONE
INC @Ri 1 1 ((Ri)) ((Ri)) + 1 NONE
DEC A 1 1 (A) (A) - 1 NONE
54 8051 Microcontroller

DEC Rn 1 1 (Rn) (Rn) - 1 NONE

DEC direct 2 1 (direct) (direct) - 1 NONE
DEC @Ri 1 1 ((Ri)) ((R1)) - 1 NONE
INC DPTR 1 2 (DPTR) (DPRT) + 1 NONE
MUL AB 1 4 (B)15- 8 (A)7-8 AxB CY & OV
Quotient in A & CY
DIV AB 1 4 (A/B)
Remainder in B   
Decimal Adjustment CY & AC
Accumulator.
If (A)3-0> 9 or (AC) = 1
Then
DA A 1 1 Add +6 to (A)3-0

If (A)7-4> 9 or (CY) = 1
Then
Add +6 to (A)7-4

Data Transfer Instructions

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
MOV A, #data NONE 2 1
Operation (A) 8-bit data
Description Moves the 8-bit immediate data to the Accumulator.
Example MOV A, #04H
Before Execution After Execution
A = XX A = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV A, Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Moves the contents of register Rn to the Accumulator.
Example MOV A, R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = XX & R1 = 05H A = 05H
8051 Instruction Set 55

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV A, direct NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (direct) where direct is the address
Description Moves the contents of direct address to the Accumulator.
Example MOV A, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = XX & 50H = 04H A = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV A, @Ri NONE 1 1
Operation (A) ((Ri)) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1.
Description Moves the contents of indirect RAM address to the Accumulator.
Example MOV A, @R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = XX, R0 = 50H & 50H = 04H A = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV Rn, A NONE 1 1
Operation (Rn) (A) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Moves the contents of Accumulator to the register Rn.
Example MOV R1, A
Before Execution After Execution
R1 = XX & A = 04H R1 = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV Rn, #data NONE 2 1
Operation (Rn) 8-bit data
Description Moves the 8-bit immediate data to the register Rn.
Example MOV R1, #04H
Before Execution After Execution
R1 = XX R1 = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV Rn, direct NONE 2 2
Operation (Rn) (Direct) where direct is the address
Description Moves the contents of direct address to the register Rn.
Example MOV R1, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
R1 = XX & 50H = 04H A = 04H
56 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV direct, A NONE 2 1
Operation (direct) (A) where direct is the address
Description Moves the contents of Accumulator to direct address.
Example MOV 50H, A
Before Execution After Execution
50H = XX & A = 04H 50H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV direct, Rn NONE 2 2
Operation (direct) (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7i.e. R0 to R7
Description Moves the contents of register Rn to Accumulator.
Example MOV 50H, R1
Before Execution After Execution
R1 = 04H & 50H = XX 50H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV direct, direct NONE 3 2
Operation (direct) (direct) where direct is the address
Description Moves the contents of direct address to direct address.
Example MOV 50H, 30H
Before Execution After Execution
50H = XX & 30H = 04H 50H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV @Ri, A NONE 1 1
Operation ((Ri)) (A) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1.
Description Moves the contents of Accumulator to indirect RAM address.
Example MOV @R1, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
R1 =30H, 30H = XX & 50H = 04H 30H = 04H
8051 Instruction Set 57

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV @Ri, #data NONE 2 1
Operation ((Ri)) 8 bit data where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1.
Description Moves the 8-bit data to indirect RAM address.
Example MOV @R1, #04H
Before Execution After Execution
R1 =30H & 30H = XX 30H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV @Ri, direct NONE 2 2
Operation ((Ri)) (direct) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1.
Description Moves the contents of direct address to the register indirect RAM
address.
Example MOV @R1, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
R1 =30H, 30H = XX & 50H = 04H 30H = 04H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV DPTR, #data NONE 3 2
Operation (DPTR) 16 bit data where DPTR = DPH + DPL
Description Moves the 16-bit data tothe data pointer register.
Example MOV DPTR, #1234H
Before Execution After Execution
DPTR = XX DPTR = 1234H i.e. DPH = 12H & DPL =
34H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOVC A,@A+DPTR NONE 1 2
Operation (A) (A + DPTR)
Description The MOVC instruction moves a byte from the code or program memory
to the accumulator.
The Code Memory address from which the byte will be moved is calculated
by summing the value of the Accumulator with either DPTR.
Example MOVC A,@A+DPTR
58 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOVC A,@A+PC NONE 1 2
Operation (PC) (PC + 1)
(A) (A+PC)
Description The MOVC instruction moves a byte from the code or program memory
to the accumulator.
The Code Memory address from which the byte will be moved is
calculated by summing the value of the Accumulator with the Program
Counter (PC).
The Program Counter (PC) is first incremented by 1 before being
summed with the Accumulator.
Example MOVC A,@A+PC

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOVX A,@Ri NONE 1 2
Operation (A) ((Ri)) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1
Description Moves the indirect external RAM (8-bit address) to the accumulator
Example MOVX A,@R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = XX , R1 =30H & 30H = FFH A = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOVX A,@DPTR NONE 1 2
Operation (A) ((DPTR))
Description Moves the external RAM (16-bit address) to the accumulator
Example MOVX A,@DPTR
Before Execution After Execution
A = XX, DPTR = 1234H & 1234H = FFH A = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOVX @Ri,A NONE 1 2
Operation ((Ri)) (A) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1
Description Moves the contents of accumulator to the indirect external RAM (8-bit
address)
Example MOVX @R0,A
Before Execution After Execution
R0 =30H, 30H = XX & A = FFH 30H = FFH
8051 Instruction Set 59

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOVX @DPTR,A NONE 1 2
Operation
Description Moves the contents of Accumulator to the indirect external RAM
(16-bit address)
Example MOVX @DPTR,A
Before Execution After Execution
DPTR = 1234H, 1234H = XX & A = FFH 1234H = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

PUSH direct NONE 2 2
Operation (SP) (SP) + 1

(SP) (direct)
Description Push onto Stack
• The stack pointer is incremented by one. The content of the
indicated variable is then copied into the internal RAM location
address by the stack pointer.
• The PUSH instruction supports only direct addressing mode.
Therefore, PUSH A, PUSH R0 etc. are invalid instructions.
Example 1. PUSH 0E0H ; 0E0H is the RAM address of Accumulator.

2. PUSH 00H ; 00H is the RAM address of R0 of Bank 0.

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

POP direct NONE 2 2
Operation (direct) (SP)
(SP) (SP) - 1
Description POP from the stack.
• The POP instruction copies the byte pointed to by Stack pointer
(SP) to the location where direct address is indicated and
decremented SP by 1.
• The POP instruction supports only direct addressing mode.
Therefore, Therefore, POP A, POP R0 etc. are invalid
instructions.
Example POP 0E0H ; 0E0H is the RAM address of Accumulator.
POP 00H ; 00H is the RAM address of R0 of Bank 0.
60 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XCH A, Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Exchanges the contents of register Rn with the contents of
Accumulator.
Example XCH A, R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH & R1 = BBH A = BBH & R1 = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XCH A, direct NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (direct)
Description Exchanges the contents of direct address with Accumulator
contents.
Example XCH A, 50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH & 50H = BBH A = BBH & 50H = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XCH A, @Ri NONE 1 1
Operation (A) ((Ri)) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1
Description Exchanges the contents of indirect RAM address with accumulator
contents.
Example XCH A, @R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH, R0 = 50H & 50H = BBH A = BBH, R0 = 50H & 50H = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XCHD A,@Ri NONE 1 1
Operation (A)3-0 ((Ri))3-0 where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1
Description Exchanges the low-order nibble indirect RAM with the accumulator
contents.
Example XCHD A,@R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH, R0 = 50H & 50H = BBH A = FBH, R0 = 50H & 50H = FBH
8051 Instruction Set 61

Table: 2.4.2: Data Transfer Instructions

F l a g s
Mnemonics Byte Cycle Operation
Affected
MOV A, #data 2 1 (A) 8 bit data NONE
MOV A, Rn 1 1 (A) (Rn) NONE
MOV A, direct 2 1 (A) (Direct) NONE
MOV A, @Ri 1 1 (A) ((Ri)) NONE
MOV Rn, A 1 1 (Rn) (A) NONE
MOV Rn, #data 2 1 (Rn) 8 bit data NONE
MOV Rn, direct 2 2 (Rn) (Direct) NONE
MOV direct, A 2 1 (direct) (A) NONE
MOV direct, Rn 2 2 (direct) (Rn) NONE
MOV direct, direct 3 2 (direct) (Direct) NONE
MOV @Ri, A 1 1 ((Ri)) (A) NONE
MOV @Ri, #data 2 1 ((Ri)) 8 bit data NONE
MOV @Ri, direct 2 2 ((Ri)) (Direct) NONE
MOV DPTR, #data 3 2 (DPTR) 16 bit data NONE
MOVC A,@A+DPTR 1 2 (A) (A + DPTR) NONE
1 2 (PC) (PC + 1) NONE
MOVC A,@A+PC
(B) (A+PC)
MOVX A,@Ri 1 2 (A) ((Ri)) NONE
MOVX A,@DPTR 1 2 (A) ((DPTR)) NONE
MOVX @Ri,A 1 2 ((Ri)) (A) NONE
MOVX @DPTR,A 1 2 ((DPTR)) (A) NONE
2 2 (SP) (SP) + 1 NONE
PUSH direct
(SP) (direct)
2 2 (direct) (SP) NONE
POP direct
(SP) (SP) - 1
XCH A, Rn 1 1 (B) (Rn) NONE
XCH A, direct 2 1 (B) (direct) NONE
XCH A, @Ri 1 1 (A) ((Ri)) NONE
XCHD A,@Ri 1 1 (A)3-0 ((Ri))3-0 NONE
62 8051 Microcontroller

Data Transfer Instructions

Logial instructions
Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
ANL A,#data NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (A) AND 8-bit data
Description AND the content of 8-bit immediate data with the content of
accumulator and result is stored in accumulator.
Example ANL A,#0FH
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH A = 0FH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL A,Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) AND (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description AND the content of register Rn with the content of accumulator and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ANL A,R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH & R1 = 0FH A = 0FH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL A,direct NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (A) AND (direct address) where direct is the address
Description AND the content of direct address with the content of accumulator
and result is stored in accumulator.
Example ANL A,50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH & 50H = 0FH A = 0FH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL A,@Ri NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) AND (Ri)) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7i.e. R0 to R7
Description AND the content of indirect address with the content of accumulator
and result is stored in accumulator.
Example ANL A,@R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH, R1 = 50H & 50H = F0H A = F0H
8051 Instruction Set 63

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL direct,A NONE 2 1
Operation (direct) (direct) AND (A)
Description AND the content of accumulator with the content of direct address
and result is stored in direct address.
Example ANL 50H,A
Before Execution After Execution
50H = FFH & A = 0FH 50H = 0FH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL direct,#data NONE 3 2
Operation (direct) (direct) AND 8-bit data
Description AND the content of 8-bit immediate data with the content of direct
address and result is stored in direct address.
Example ANL 50H,#0FH
Before Execution After Execution
50H= AAH 50H= 0AH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL A,#data NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (A) OR 8-bit data
Description OR the content of Accumulator with the 8-bit immediate data and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ORL A,#00H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 75H & R0 = 00H A = 75H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL A,Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) OR (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description OR the content of register Rn with the content of accumulator and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ORL A,R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = 75H & R0 = 00H A = 75H
64 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL A,direct NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (A) OR (direct) where direct is the address
Description OR the content of direct address with the content of accumulator and
result is stored in accumulator.
Example ORL A,50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 75H & 50H = FFH A=FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL A,@Ri NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) OR ((Ri)) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description OR the content of indirect address with the content of accumulator
and result is stored in accumulator.
Example ORL A,@R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH, R1 = 50H & 50H = 00H A = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL direct,A NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (direct) OR (A) where direct is the address
Description OR the content of accumulator with the content of direct address and
result is stored in direct address.
Example ORL 50H,A
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH & 50H = FFH A = FFH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL direct,#data NONE 3 2
Operation (direct) (direct) OR 8 - bit data
Description OR the content of 8-bit immediate data with the content of direct
address and result is stored in direct address.
Example ORL 20H,#50H
Before Execution After Execution
20H = 32H & 8-bit data (50H) 20H = 72H
8051 Instruction Set 65

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XRL A,#data NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (A) EX-OR 8-bit data
Description Exclusive OR the 8-bit immediate data with accumulator content
and result is stored in accumulator.
Example XRL A,#09H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 39H & 8-bit data = 09H A = 30H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XRL A,Rn NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A)EX-OR (Rn) where n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 i.e., R0 to R7
Description Exclusive OR the content of register Rn with accumulator content
and result is stored in accumulator.
Example XRL A,R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 39H & R1 = 09H A = 30H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XRL A,direct NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (A) EX-OR (direct address) where direct is the address
Description Exclusive OR the content of direct address with accumulator
contents and result is stored in accumulator.
Example XRL A,50H
Before Execution After Execution
A = 39H & 50H = 09H A = 30H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XRL A,@Ri NONE 1 1
Operation (A) (A) EX-OR ((Ri)) where i = 0 & 1 i.e. R0 & R1
Description Exclusive OR the content of indirect RAM address with accumulator
content and result is stored in accumulator.
Example XRL A,@R0
Before Execution After Execution
A = 39H, R0 = 50H & 50H = 09H A = 30H
66 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XRL direct,A NONE 2 1
Operation (A) (direct) EX-OR (A)
Description Exclusive OR the content of direct address with accumulator
contents and result is stored in direct address.
Example XRL 50H,A
Before Execution After Execution
50H = 39H & A = 09H 50H = 30H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

XRL direct,#data NONE 3 2
Operation (A) (direct) EX-OR 8-bit data
Description Exclusive OR the content of direct address with 8-bit data and result
is stored in direct address.
Example XRL 50H,#09H
Before Execution After Execution
50H = 39H & A = 09H 50H = 30H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CLR A NONE 1 1
Operation Clear Accumulator
(A) 0
Description The content of Accumulator is cleared (A=00H). All the bits of the ac-
cumulator are set to 0.
Example CLR A
Before Execution After Execution
A = FFH A = 00H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CPL A NONE 1 1
Operation Complement Accumulator
–
(A) (A )
Description The content of Accumulator is Complemented. The result is 1s
complement of the accumulator i.e. 0s become 1s & 1s become 0s.
Example CPL A
Before Execution After Execution
A = 00H A = FFH
8051 Instruction Set 67

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SWAP A NONE 1 1
Operation SWAP nibbles within the Accumulator
(A) [(A)7- 4 (A)3-0 ]
Description The SWAP instruction interchanges the lower nibble (A)3-0 with the
upper nibble (A)7-4 within the Accumulator.
Example SWAP A
Before Execution After Execution
A = AFH A = FAH

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

RL A NONE 1 1
Operation Rotate Accumulator Left
An+1 An where n = 0 to 6
A0 A7
Description The RL A instruction rotates the eight bits in the accumulator left one
bit position. Thebit 7 of the accumulator is rotated into bit 0, bit 0
into bit 1, bit 1 into bit 2, and so on.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Example RL A
Before Execution After Execution
A = C2 H A = 85H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

RLC A CY 1 1
Operation Rotate Accumulator Left through the Carry Flag.
An+1 An where n = 0 to 6
A0 C
C A7
Description The 8-bits in the accumulator & the carry flag are together rotated
1-bit to the left. The bit-7 moves into the Carry flag. The original state
of the carry flag moves into the bit-0 position.
C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Carry flag
Example RLC A
Before Execution After Execution
A = C2 H & CY = 0 A = 84H & CY =1
68 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

RR A NONE 1 1
Operation Rotate Accumulator Right through the carry flag.
An An+1 where n = 0 to 6
A7 A0
Description The 8-bits in the accumulator are rotated 1-bit to the right i.e. bit-0
is rotated into the bit-7 position.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PRA

Example RR A
Before Execution After Execution
A = C2 H A = 61H

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

RRC A CY 1 1
Operation Rotate Accumulator Right through the Carry Flag.
An An+1 where n = 0 to 6
A7 C
C A0
Description The 8-bits in the accumulator & the carry flag are together rotated
1-bit to the right. Bit-0 moves into the Carry flag. The original state of
the carry flag moves into the bit-7 position.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C

Carry flag

Example RRC A
Before Execution After Execution
A = C2 H & CY = 0 A = 61H & CY = 0

Logical Instructions
Mnemonics Byte Cycle Operation Flags
Affected
8051 Instruction Set 69

ANL A,#data 2 1 (A) (A) AND 8-bit data NONE

ANL A,Rn 1 1 (A) (A) AND (Rn) NONE
ANL A,direct 2 1 (A) (A) AND (direct address) NONE
ANL A,@Ri 1 1 (A) (A) AND (Ri)) NONE
ANL direct,A 2 1 (direct) (direct) AND (A) NONE
ANL direct,#data 3 2 (direct) (direct) AND 8-bit data NONE
ORL A,#data 2 1 (A) (A) OR 8-bit data NONE
ORL A,Rn 1 1 (A) (A) OR (Rn) NONE
ORL A,direct 2 1 (A) (A) OR (direct) NONE
ORL A,@Ri 1 1 (A) (A) OR ((Ri)) NONE
ORL direct,A 2 1 (A) (direct) OR (A) NONE
ORL direct,#data 3 2 (direct) (direct) OR 8 - bit data NONE
XRL A,#data 2 1 (A) (A) EX-OR 8-bit data NONE
XRL A,Rn 1 1 (A) EX-OR (Rn) NONE
XRL A,direct 2 1 (A) (A) EX-OR (direct address) NONE
XRL A,@Ri 1 1 (A) (A) EX-OR ((Ri)) NONE
XRL direct,A 2 1 (A) (direct) EX-OR (A) NONE
CLR A 1 1 (A) 0 NONE
–
CPL A 1 1 (A) (A) NONE
SWAP A 1 1 (B) [(A)7- 4 (A)3-0 ] NONE
RL A 1 1 Rotate Accumulator Left NONE
An+1 An where n = 0 to 6
A0 A7
RLC A 1 1 Rotate Accumulator Left through CY
the Carry Flag.
An+1 An where n = 0 to 6
A0 C
C A7
RR A 1 1 Rotate Accumulator Right through NONE
the carry flag.
An An+1 where n = 0 to 6
A7 A0
RRC A 1 1 Rotate Accumulator Right through CY
the Carry Flag.
An An+1 where n = 0 to 6
A7 C
C A0
70 8051 Microcontroller

Boolean Instructions
Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
CLR C CY 1 1
Operation (CY) 0
Description Clear the carry flag bit.
Example CLR C
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 1 CY = 0

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CLR bit NONE 2 1
Operation (bit) 0
Description Clear the specified bit.
Example CLR P0.0
Before Execution After Execution
P0.0 = X P0.0 = 0

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SETB C CY 1 1
Operation (CY) 1
Description SET the carry flag bit.
Example SETB C
Before Execution After Execution
CY = X CY = 1

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SETB bit NONE 2 1
Operation (bit) 1
Description SET the specified bit.
Example SETB ACC.1
Before Execution After Execution
ACC.1 = X ACC.1 = 1
8051 Instruction Set 71

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CPL C CY 1 1
Operation (CY) NOT(CY)
Description Complement the carry flag bit.
Example CPL C
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 0 CY = 1

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CPL bit NONE 2 1
Operation (bit) NOT(bit)
Description Complement the specified bit.
Example CPL ACC.5
Before Execution After Execution
ACC.5 = 1 ACC.5 = 0

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL C,bit CY 2 2
Operation (C) (C) AND (bit)
Description AND the content of carry flag bit with a source bit and the result
is placed in carry flag.
Example ANL C, P1.7
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 1 & P1.7 = 1 CY = 1

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ANL C,/bit CY 2 2
Operation (C) (C) AND [ NOT(bit) ]
Description AND the content of carry flag bit with a complement of source bit
and the result is placed in carry flag.
Example ANL C,/ACC.7
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 1 & ACC.7 = 0 CY = 1
72 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL C,bit CY 2 2
Operation (C) (C) OR (bit)
Description OR the content of carry flag bit with a source bit and the result is
placed in carry flag.
Example ORL C,P0.0
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 0 & P0.0 = 1 CY = 1

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

ORL C,/bit CY 2 2
Operation (C) (C) OR [ NOT(bit) ]
Description OR the content of carry flag bit with a complement of source bit
and the result is placed in carry flag.
Example ORL C,/ACC.0
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 0 & ACC.0 = 0 CY = 1

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV C,bit CY 2 1
Operation (C) (bit)
Description Move the content of source bit to carry flag.
Example MOV C,P1.7
Before Execution After Execution
CY = X & P1.7 = 1 CY = 1

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

MOV bit,C NONE 2 2
Operation (bit) (C)
Description Move the content of carry flag to destination bit.
Example MOV ACC.0,C
Before Execution After Execution
ACC.0 = X & CY = 1 ACC.0 = 1
8051 Instruction Set 73

Boolean Instructions
Mnemonics Byte Cycle Operation Flags Affected
CLR C 1 1 (CY) 0 CY
CLR bit 1 1 (bit) 0 NONE
SETB C 1 1 (CY) 1 CY
SETB bit 2 1 (bit) 1 NONE
CPL C 1 1 (CY) NOT(CY) CY
CPL bit 2 1 (bit) NOT(bit) NONE
ANL C,bit 2 2 (C) (C) AND (bit) CY
ANL C,/bit 2 2 (C) (C) AND [ NOT(bit) ] CY
ORL C,bit 2 2 (C) (C) OR (bit) CY
ORL C,/bit 2 2 (C) (C) OR [ NOT(bit) ] CY
MOV C,bit 2 1 (C) (bit) CY
MOV bit,C 2 2 (bit) (C) NONE

Program Branching Instructions

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles
ACALL addr11 NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)7-0
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)15-8
(PC)10-0 Page address

Description Absolute subroutine call. Transfer control to a subroutine.

• ACALL unconditionally calls a subroutine located at the indicated
address. The instruction increments the PC twice to obtain the
address of the following instruction, then pushes 16-bit result
onto the stack i.e., low order byte 1st & increment the stack
pointer to store higher-order byte.
• ACALL is a 2-byte instruction, in which 5-bits are used for
the opcode and the remaining 11-bits are used for the target
subroutine address.
• A 11-bit address limits the range to 2 Kbytes.
74 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

LCALL addr16 NONE 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)7-0
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)15-8
(PC) Page address
Description • Long call. Transfer control to a subroutine. LCALL
unconditionally calls a subroutine located at the indicated
address. The instruction increments the PC thrice to obtain
the address of the next instruction & then pushes 16-bit result
onto the stack i.e. low order byte 1st & increment the stack
pointer to store higher-order byte.
• LCALL is a 2-byte instruction, in which 16-bits are used for the
opcode and for the target subroutine address.
• A 16-bit address may be anywhere within the 64 Kbytes of
program memory.

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

RET NONE 1 2
Operation (PC)15-8 (SP)
(SP) (SP) -1
(PC)7-0 (SP)
(SP) (SP) -1
Description Returns from subroutine.
• RET instruction is used to return from a subroutine previously
entered by instruction LCALL or ACALL. The top two bytes of
the stack are popped in the program counter (PC) & program
execution continues at this new address.
• After popping the top two bytes of the stack into the program
counter, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 2.

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

8051 Instruction Set 75

RETI NONE 1 2
Operation (PC)15-8 (SP)
(SP) (SP)-1
(PC)7-0 (SP)
(SP) (SP) -1
Description Absolute subroutine call.
• RET instruction is used at the end of an Interrupt Service Routine
(ISR). The top two bytes of the stack are popped in the program
counter (PC), the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 2.

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

AJMP addr11 NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
(PC)10-0 (A)10-0
Description Absolute subroutine call
• The AJMP instruction transfers program execution to the
specified address.
• The address is formed by combining the 5 high-order bits of
the address of the following instruction (for A15-A11), the 3 high-
order bits of the opcode (for A10-A8), and the second byte of the
instruction (for A7-A0).
• The destination address must be located in the same 2 Kbyte
block of program memory as the opcode following the AJMP
instruction.
Example AJMP LABEL

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

LJMP addr16 NONE 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Long Jump.
The LJMP instruction transfers program execution to the specified
16-bit address.
• Jump unconditionally to the specified address (i.e. LABEL) by
loading high order and low order bytes of the PC respectively.
• Its range is -32768 bytes to +32767 bytes.
• The destination may be anywhere within the 64 Kbytes of
program memory.
Example LJMP LABEL
76 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

SJMP rel NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Short Jump.
Jump unconditionally to the specified address (i.e. LABEL).
Its range is -128 bytes to +127 bytes.
Example 0091 MOV R0,#05H
0092 SJMP, NEXT
0093 MOV P1,A
0094 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
PC = 0092 PC = 0094

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JC rel NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
If CY=1
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if carry is set.
If CY = 1, jump to the address indicated otherwise proceeds (Execute)
with the next instruction.
Example 0090 SETB C
0091 JC, NEXT
0092 MOV P1,A
0093 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 1 & PC = 0091 PC = 0093
8051 Instruction Set 77

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JNC rel NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
If CY=0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if not carry.
If CY = 0, jump to the address indicated otherwise proceeds (Execute)
with the next instruction.
Example 0090 SETB C
0091 JNC, NEXT
0092 MOV P1,A
0093 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
CY = 1 & PC = 0091 PC = 0092

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JB bit,rel NONE 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If (bit) = 1
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if bit set.
If the indicated bit is SET (1), jump to the address indicated otherwise
proceeds (Execute)with the next instruction.
Example 0090 SETB ACC.0
0091 JB ACC.0, NEXT
0092 MOV P1,A
0093 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
ACC.0 = 1 & PC = 0091 ACC.0 = 1 & PC = 0093
78 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JNB bit,rel NONE 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If (bit) = 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if bit not set
If the indicated bit is RESET (0), jump to the address indicated
otherwise proceeds (Execute) with the next instruction.
Example 0090 MOV C, 0
0091 MOV ACC.0, C
0092 JNB ACC.0, NEXT
0093 MOV P1, A
0094 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
ACC.0 = 0 & PC = 0092 ACC.0 = 0 & PC = 0094

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JBC bit,rel NONE 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If (bit) = 1
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if bit set & clear it.
If the bit = 1, then processor jump to the specified address (i.e. LABEL),
at the same time the bit is cleared to zero i.e. bit = 0.
If the bit = 0, then processor proceeds (Execute)with the next
instruction.
Example 0090 SETB ACC.0
0091 JBC ACC.0, NEXT
0092 MOV P1,A
0093 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
ACC.0 = 1 & PC = 0091 ACC.0 = 0 & PC = 0093
8051 Instruction Set 79

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JMP @A+DPTR NONE 1 2
Operation (PC) (A) + (DPTR)
Description Jump indirect relative to the DPTR.
Jump unconditionally to the specified address (i.e. LABEL). The target
address is provided by the total sum of Accumulator & the content
of DPTR register.
This instruction is not widely used.
Example 0090 MOV A,#24H
0091 MOV DPTR,#0070H
0092 JMP @A+DPTR
0093 MOV P1,A
0094 INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 24H, DPTR = 0070H PC = 0094
& PC = 0092

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JNZ rel NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
If A ≠ 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if Accumulator is NOT zero.
If ACC ≠ 0, then processor jump to the specified address (i.e. LABEL),
If ACC = 0, then processor proceeds (Execute) with the next instruc-
tion.
Example 0090 MOV A,#05H
0091 ADD A,#03H
0092 JNZ, NEXT
0093 MOV P1,A
0094 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 08H & PC = 0092 PC = 0094
80 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

JZ rel NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
If A = 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Jump if Accumulator is zero.
If ACC = 0, then processor jump to the specified address (i.e. LABEL),
If ACC ≠ 0, then processor proceeds (Execute) with the next
instruction.
Example 0090 MOV A,#05H
0091 ADD A,#03H
0092 JZ, NEXT
0093 MOV P1,A
0094 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
A = 08H & PC = 0092 PC = 0093

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CJNE A,direct,rel CY 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If (A) ≠ (direct)
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If (A) < (direct)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
Description Compare and Jump if not equal.
• The magnitudes of the source byte and destination byte are
compared. If they are not equal, it jumps to the target.
8051 Instruction Set 81

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CJNE A,#data,rel CY 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If (A) ≠ data
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If (A) < (data)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
Description Compare and Jump if not equal.
The magnitudes of the source byte and destination byte are com-
pared. If they are not equal, it jumps to the target.

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CJNE Rn,#data,rel CY 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If (Rn) ≠ data
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If (Rn) < (data)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
Description Compare and Jump if not equal.
The magnitudes of the source byte and destination byte are compared.
If they are not equal, it jumps to the target.
82 8051 Microcontroller

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

CJNE @Ri,#data,rel CY 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 3
If ((Ri)) ≠ data
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If ((Ri)) < (data)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
Description Absolute subroutine call
Example Compare and Jump if not equal.
The magnitudes of the source byte and destination byte are compared.
If they are not equal, it jumps to the target.

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DJNZ Rn,rel NONE 2 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
(Rn) (Rn) -1
If (Rn) ≠ 0 i.e. (Rn) > 0& (Rn) < 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Decrement and Jump if not zero.
Decrement the content of Rn register & then checks the condition i.e.
Rn≠ 0.
If Rn≠ 0, jump to the specified address (i.e. LABEL),
If Rn= 0, then processor proceeds (Execute) with the next
instruction.
Example 0091 MOV R0,#05H
0092 DJNZ R0, NEXT
0093 MOV P1,A
0094 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
Rn = 05H & PC = 0092 PC = 0094
8051 Instruction Set 83

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

DJNZ direct,rel 3 2
Operation (PC) (PC) + 2
(direct) (direct) -1
If (direct) ≠ 0 i.e. (direct) > 0& (direct) < 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
Description Decrement and Jump if not zero.
Decrement the content of direct address & then checks the condition
i.e. (direct) ≠ 0.
If (direct) ≠ 0, jump to the specified address (i.e. LABEL),
If (direct) = 0, then processor proceeds (Execute) with the next instruc-
tion.
Example 0091 MOV R0,#05H
0092 DJNZ 50H, NEXT
0093 MOV P1,A
0094 NEXT: INC R1
Before Execution After Execution
direct = 50H, 50H = 01 & PC = 0092 PC = 0094

Syntax Flags affected Bytes Cycles

NOP NONE 1 1
Operation (PC) (PC) + 1
Description No operation
• NOP instruction performs NO OPERATION& execution continues
with the next instruction.
• It is sometimes used for timing delays to waste clock cycles.
• This instruction only updates the PC to point to the next
instruction following up.
Example 0091 MOV A,#25H
0092 ADD A,#20H
0093 NOP
0094 INC A
END
Before Execution After Execution
PC = 0093H PC = 0094H
84 8051 Microcontroller

Program Branching Instructions

Mnemonics Byte Cycle Operation Flags

Affected
ACALL addr11 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)7-0
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)15-8
(PC)10-0 Page address
LCALL addr16 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 NONE
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)7-0
(SP) (SP) + 1
(SP) (PC)15-8
(PC) Page address
RET 1 2 (PC)15-8 (SP) NONE
(SP) (SP) –1
(PC)7-0(SP)
(SP) (SP) –1
RETI 1 2 (PC)15-8 (SP) NONE
(SP) (SP) -1
(PC)7-0(SP)
(SP) (SP) -1
AJMP addr11 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE
(PC)10-0 (A)10-0
LJMP addr16 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE
(PC) (PC) + rel
SJMP rel 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE
(PC) (PC) + rel

JC rel 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE

If CY=1
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel

JNC rel 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE

If CY=0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
8051 Instruction Set 85

JB bit,rel 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 NONE

If (bit) = 1
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel

JBCbit,rel 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 NONE

If (bit) = 1
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel

JMP @A+DPTR 1 2 (PC) (A) + (DPTR) NONE

JNZ rel 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE

If A ≠ 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel

JZ rel 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE

If A = 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel

CJNE 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 CY

A,direct,rel If (A) ≠ (direct)
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If (A) < (direct)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
CJNE 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 CY
A,#data,rel If (A) ≠ data
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If (A) < (data)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
86 8051 Microcontroller

CJNE 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 CY

Rn,#data,rel If (Rn) ≠ data
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If (Rn) < (data)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
CJNE @ 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 3 CY
Ri,#data,rel If ((Ri)) ≠ data
then
(PC) (PC) + relative address

If ((Ri)) < (data)

then
(C) 1
else
(C) 0
DJNZ Rn,rel 2 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE
(Rn) (Rn) -1
If (Rn) ≠ 0 i.e. (Rn) > 0& (Rn) < 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
DJNZ direct,rel 3 2 (PC) (PC) + 2 NONE
(direct) (direct) -1
If (direct) ≠ 0 i.e. (direct) > 0&
(direct) < 0
Then,
(PC) (PC) + rel
NOP 1 1 (PC) (PC) + 1 NONE
Machine Cycle

P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
One machine cycle
6 states, 12 pulses

Fig. 2.1.1: Machine cycle

8051 Instruction Set 87

In 8051, two pulses constitute a state and machine cycle is made up of six
states. Some instructions may require more than one machine cycle.
The time required to execute an instruction is given by

C × 12d
T=
f
Where, T is the time for instruction to be executed
f is the crystal frequency and
C is the number of machine cycles.

Example2.1
For 8051 microcontroller, find the time taken for an instructions which takes
i) 1 Machine cycle   ii) 2 Machine cycles   iii) 4 Machine cycles

Solution:
C × 12d 1 × 12
i) T= = = 1.085 µSec
f 11.0592 × 106
C × 12d 2 × 12
ii) T= = = 2.170 µSec
f 11.0592 × 106
C × 12d 4 × 12
iii) T= = = 4.340 µSec
f 11.0592 × 106

Assembly Language Programs

Write an ALP to find the square of a number stored at 30H.
Program Comments
ORG 00H ; Start
MOV A,30H ; Move content of 30H to A register
MOV 0F0H, 30H ; Move content of 30H to B register
MUL AB ; Square of 30H content
MOV 31H,A ; Move LSB of the result to 31H
MOV 32H,0F0H ; Move MSB of the result to 32H
END ; End
 3
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and
Programming
3.1 STACK
• Stack is a section of internal RAM used by the CPU to store information
temporarily. This information could be data or an address.
• The register used to access the stack is called the stack pointer (SP) register.
• The stack pointer is a 8-bit register used by the 8051 to hold an internal RAM
address that is called the top of the stack.
• When data is to be placed on the stack, the SP increments before storing data
on the stack i.e. SP = SP + 1, so that the stack grows up as data is stored.
• When 8051 is RESET, the SP is set to 07H.
• As the data is retrieved from the stack, the byte is read from stack & then SP
decrements i.e. SP = SP-1 to point to the next available byte of stored data.
• Storing the data onto stack is called a PUSH.
• Retrieving the contents of the stack is called a POP.
• RAM location 08H is the 1st location used by the stack to store the data.

3.1.1Pushing into stack:

Example 3.1
MOV R2, #30H
PUSH 2
Assume that initially Bank 0 is selected & SP=07H
Solution:

SP is 1st incremented by one i.e. SP = SP+1, then the contents of R2 is stored

in top of stack i.e. 08H address.

88
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 89

Before execution After execution

0Bh 0Bh

0Ah 0Ah
Sp = Sp+1
09h Sp = 08h 09h
30 Sp = 08h
08h 08h
Sp = 07h

Example 3.2
ORG 00H
MOV R2, #30H
MOV R3, #40H
MOV R4, #41H
PUSH 2
PUSH 3
PUSH 4
END
Solution:

Assume Bank0 is selected and SP has initially 07H

Before execution

0Bh

0Ah

09h
08h

After Execution

After Push 2 After Push 3 After Push 4

0Bh 0Bh 0Bh

41
0Ah 0Ah 0Ah
40 40
09h 09h 09h
08h 30 08h 30 08h 30
Sp = 08h Sp = 09h Sp = 0Ah
90 8051 Microcontroller

Upper limit of stack:

• Locations 08H to 1FH in 8051 RAM can be used for stack because location 20H-2Fh
of RAM are reserved for bit addressable memory and must not be used by stack.
• If in program, we need more than 24 bytes (08H to 1FH = 24 bytes) of stack
then we can change SP to point to RAM location 30H to 7FH. This is done by
the instruction ‘MOV SP,#XXH”

Example 3.3
ORG 00H
MOV SP, #30H
SETB PSW.3
MOV R0, #0FFH
MOV R1, #0EEH
MOV A, #01H
PUSH 8
PUSH 9
PUSH 0E0H
END
Solution:
Before execution After execution

34h 34h

33h 33h
01 Sp
32h 32h
EE
31h 31h
EF
30h 30h
Sp = 30h Sp = 32h

3.1.2 Popping from stack:

Example 3.4:
POP 4
POP 3
POP 2
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 91

Solution:

Before execution
FF Sp = 0Bh
0Bh
41
0Ah
40
09h
30
08h

After execution

After Pop 4 → SP = Sp – 1 After Pop 3 → SP = Sp – 1 After Pop 2 → SP = Sp – 1

0Bh 0Bh 0Bh

41 Sp=0Ah
0Ah 0Ah 0Ah
40 40 Sp=09h
09h 09h 09h
30 30 30 Sp=08h
08h 08h 08h

(R4) = FFh (R3) = 41h (R2) = 40h

3.2 Jump and Call Instructions:

Jump and call instructions replaces the contents of program counter (PC) with new
address and program execution to start from that new address. The difference of this
new address from address in program where jump or call instruction is called range
of jump or call.
Jump or call instructions may have one of the three ranges:

i) Relative range: +127d to -128d

ii) Absolute range: within a page (2K bytes)
iii) Long range: 0000H to FFFFH

i) Relative range:
• The Jump can be within –128 bytes. (for backward Jump) or +127 bytes (for
forward Jump) of memory relative to the address of current program counter
(PC).
• Jump or call instruction with relative range will be of 2-byte instructions. The
1st byte is opcode and second byte is relative address of target location.
92 8051 Microcontroller

Memory address (HEX)

FFFF
LADD Limit

Next Page
SADD Limit

PC + 127d Relative Limit JC

JNC Bit
JB Jumps
JNB
JBC AJMP LJMP
PC Next Opcode
CJNE
Jump Opcode DJNZ Byte
JZ Jumps
JNZ

PC – 128d Relative Limit SJMP

SADD Limit
This Page

LADD Limit
0000
Fig. 3.2.1 Jump instruction ranges
Note: SADD: Short address, LADD: Long address
ii) Absolute range:
• In 8051, program memory is divided into logical divisions called pages each of
2k byte.
• Maximum size program memory is 64 K bytes. Size of each page is 2K bytes.
64 Kb
Maximum number of pages = = 32 pages
2 Kb
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 93

(2000d) (4000d) (64000d)

7doh FAoh FFFFh

Page 1 Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32

7d1h F231h
0000H
(2001d) (62,001d)

• In absolute range, Jump can be within a single page.

• The upper 5-bits of PC holds the page number and lower 11-bits holds the
address within that page.
i.e., 25 → 32 page
    211 → 2 Kb range

16 - bit PC

5 bit 11 bit

Holds page number Holds address within page

iii) Long Absolute Range:

FFFFh

Program
Long range
M/M

0000h
• This range allows the Jump to any where in the memory location from 0000h
to FFFFh.
• The Jump or call instructions with this range will be of 3 byte instructions in
which 1st byte is opcode and 2nd and 3rd bytes represents the 16-bit address of
target location.
94 8051 Microcontroller

3.2.1 Compare Relative range, Absolute range and Long range:

Type of Jump of Ranges No. of bytes Example
CALL
Relative range –128d to +127d 2-byte instructions JC, JNC, JB, JNB,
JBC, JZ, JNZ,
DJNZ, CJNE
Absolute range Within a page 2-byte instructions ACALL
(2 Kbyte)
Long range Anywhere within 3-byte instructions LCALL
program (0H to
FFFFH)

3.3 Subroutine
A subroutine is a program that may be used many times in the execution of a larger
program. The subroutine could be written into the body of the main program everywhere
it is needed, resulting in the fastest possible code execution.

3.3.1 Call and the stack

A call instruction causes a jump to the address where the called subroutine is located.
At the end of the subroutine the program resumes operation at the opcode address
immediately following the call.
The stack area of internal RAM is used to automatically store the address, called the
return address, of the instruction found immediately after the call. The stack pointer
register holds the address of the last space used on the stack.

Program Counter

PCH PCL

SP + 2 PCH SP + 2
SP + 1 PCL SP + 1
Stack area RET RETI
SP SP
PCH PCL
Program Counter
ACALL LCALL
Interrupt Internal RAM
Fig.3.3.1: Storing and retrieving the return address
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 95

Figure 3.3.1 shows the following sequence of events.

1. A call opcode occurs in the program software, or an interrupt is generated in
the hardware circuitry.
2. The return address of the next instruction after the call instruction or interrupt
is found in the program counter.
3. The return address bytes arc pushed on the stack, low byte first.
4. The stack pointer is incremented for each push on the stack.
5. The subroutine address is placed in the program counter.
6. The subroutine is executed.
7. A RET (return) opcode is encountered at the end of the subroutine.
8. Two pop operations restore the return address to the PC from the stack area in
internal RAM.
9. The stack pointer is decremented for each address byte pop.

3.4 Assembly language program examples on subroutine and

involving loops Delay subroutine
Example 3.5:
 rite a ALP to toggle the bits of Port 2 with a delay which depends on
W
the value of a number in R1.
Solution:
METHOD 1 METHOD 2
(Without using counter value of R1)
ORG 00H ORG 00H
UP: MOV A, #00H MOV A, #00H
MOV P2, A
UP: MOV P2, A
MOV R1, #30H
ACALL DELAY
ACALL DELAY
CPL A CPL A
MOV P2, A SJMP UP
MOV R1, #0FFH DELAY:
ACALL DELAY
MOV R3, #0FFH
SJMP UP
REPEAT DJNZ R3, REPEAT
DELAY: NOP RET
REPEAT: DJNZ R1, REPEAT END
RET
END
96 8051 Microcontroller

Example 3.6:
Factorial of an 8 bit number (result maximum 8 bit)
Solution:
The factorial of a number is given by
N! = N x (N-1) x (N-2) x…..x 3 x 2 x 1
ORG 00h
MOV A,#01H
MOV B,A
UP: MUL AB
INC A
CJNE B,#06H, UP
END
Result: 6 x 5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x 1 = 120d = 78H
Example 3.7:
Factorial of an 8 bit number (result more than8 bit)
Solution:
ORG 00h
MOV A,#01H
MOV B,A
UP: MUL AB
INC A
CJNE B,#07H, UP
END
Result: 6 x 5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x 1 = 720d = 2D0H
Example 3.8:
Block move without overlap
Solution:
ORG 0000H : Specifying starting address
MOV R0, #50H : m
ove immediate data 50H into reg R0 [Source
location]
MOV R1, #60H : m
ove immediate data into 60H reg R1
[Destination location]
MOV R2, #0AH : m
ove immediate data into 0AH reg R2 [Counter
register]
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 97

UP: MOV A, @R0 : 

moves contents of R0 address to accumulator A
MOV @R1, A : m
oves contents of accumulator A to contents
of R1
INC R0 : 
Increment the R0 by one
INC R1 : 
Increment the R1 by one
DJNZ R2, UP : d
ecrement and jump if R2 is not equals to
zero
END : Terminate the program

Example 3.9:

Addition of N 8 bit numbers

Solution:
ORG 00h
MOV B,#00h ; Clear B to save the result
MOV R0,#30h ; 
Use R0 as a pointer to first memory
location
MOV A,@R0 ; 
Transfer data from first memory location
to accumulator
AGAIN:
INC R0 ; Point to next memory location
ADD A,@R0 ; Add
 data and store result in
accumulator
JNC LOOP ; 
If no carry do not increment B
INC B
LOOP:
CJNE R0,#50h,AGAIN ;Add up to memory location 50h
END ; End of program

Example 3.10:

Picking smallest/largest of N 8 bit numbers.

 SMALLEST
SMALLEST OFOF N NUMBER
N NUMBER LARGEST
LARGEST OFOF N NUMBER
N NUMBER
SMALLEST OFOF
SMALLEST N NUMBER
N NUMBER LARGEST OFOF
LARGEST N NUMBER
N NUMBER
ORG 00H
ORG 00H ORGORG00H00H
98 MOV R3,#04H 8051 Microcontroller
MOV R3,#04H MOVMOV R3,#04H
R3,#04H
ORGORG00H00H ORG ORG00H00H
MOVMOV R0,#30H
R0,#30H MOVMOV R0,#30H
R0,#30H
Solution: MOVMOVR3,#04H
R3,#04H MOV MOVR3,#04H
R3,#04H
MOVMOV A,@R0
A,@R0 MOVMOV A,@R0
A,@R0
SMALLEST MOV OFMOV
NR0,#30H
NUMBER
R0,#30H LARGEST OF MOVN NUMBER
MOVR0,#30H
R0,#30H
ORG 00H INCINC
R0 R0 ORG 00H INCINC
R0 R0
MOVMOVA,@R0
A,@R0 MOV MOVA,@R0
A,@R0
MOV R3,#04HUP:
UP: INC MOV
MOVR0 B,@R0
B,@R0 MOV R3,#04H UP:
UP: INC MOV
MOVR0 B,@R0
B,@R0
INC R0 INC R0
MOV R0,#30H CJNE A,B,NEXT MOV R0,#30H CJNE A,B,NEXT
CJNE B,@R0
UP:UP:
MOV A,B,NEXT CJNE A,B,NEXT
MOV B,@R0 UP:UP:
MOV MOVB,@R0
B,@R0
MOV A,@R0
NEXT: CARRY MOV A,@R0
NEXT: JC JC
CJNECARRY
A,B,NEXT
NEXT:
NEXT: JNCJNC NOCARRY
NOCARRY
INC R0 CJNE A,B,NEXT INC R0 CJNECJNEA,B,NEXT
A,B,NEXT
MOVMOV A,@R0
A,@R0 MOVMOV A,@R0
A,@R0
UP: MOV NEXT:
B,@R0
NEXT: CARRY
JC JC CARRY UP: MOV B,@R0NEXT:
NEXT:JNCJNCNOCARRY
NOCARRY
CJNECARRY:
CARRY: INC
A,B,NEXT
INC R0 R0 NOCARRY: INC R0
MOVMOVA,@R0
A,@R0 CJNE A,B,NEXTINC
NOCARRY: MOV R0
MOVA,@R0
A,@R0
NEXT: JC CARRYDJNZDJNZ R3,UP
R3,UP NEXT:JNC NOCARRY DJNZ
DJNZ R3,UP
CARRY:
CARRY: INCINC
R0 R0 NOCARRY:
NOCARRY: INC R0R3,UP
INC R0
MOV A,@R0MOVMOV @R0,A
@R0,A MOV A,@R0MOV MOV @R0,A
DJNZ
DJNZR3,UP
R3,UP DJNZ @R0,A
R3,UP
CARRY: INC R0 END NOCARRY: INC R0
DJNZ R3,UP
END ENDEND
MOV @R0,A MOV @R0,A
DJNZ R3,UPMOV @R0,A DJNZ R3,UPMOV @R0,A
MOV @R0,AENDEND MOV @R0,AEND
END
I/P:
I/P: END I/P:I/P:
END
I/P I/P:I/P: I/P:I/P:
I/P

     
O/P:
O/P: O/P:
O/P O/P
O/P:
O/P:
O/P: O/P:
O/P:

     

Example 3.11:
Interfacing simple switch and LED to I/O ports to switch on/off LED with
respect to switch status.
Solution:
• If SW is closed i.e. P0.0=0. Now Turn off the LED by making P2.0=1 (The cathode
is high and turns off the LED)
• If SW is open i.e. P0.0=1. Now Turn on the LED by making P2.0=0 (The cathode
is low and turns off the LED)


 M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 99

VCC = 5V
R 2.2K
LED

P2.0
5V
8051
R 10K
R 3 SW
VSSP0.0 2 1
10K

Fig.3.3.1: Shows Switch and LED interfacing to microcontroller.

 ALGORITHM
1. Start
2. Make P0.0 as an input
3. Continuously monitor Switch status on pin P0.0
4. When switch is open circuit i.e. P0.0=1, Turn ON LED by clearing P2.0=0
5. Wait for some time (delay)
6. When switch is short circuit i.e. P0.0=0, Turn OFF LED by setting P2.0=1
7. Wait for some time (delay)
8. Go to step 2
9. End

Assembly Language Program C Language Program

(Refer after reading Appendix 3)
ORG 00H #include <reg51.h>
SETB P0.0 void delay(unsigned inti);
sbit led=P2^0;
NEXT: JB P0.0, ON sbit sw=P0^0;
SETB P2.0 void main(void)
ACALL DELAY {
SJMP NEXT  sw=1; //make sw as an
ON: MOV C, 0       input
MOV P2.0, C while (1)
ACALL DELAY {
SJMP NEXT if (sw==1)
DELAY: led=0;
Continued.....
100 8051 Microcontroller

MOV R0, #255 delay(100);

UP2: MOV R1, #255
UP1: DJNZ R1, UP1 else
DJNZ R0, UP2 led=1;
delay(100);
RET
}
}
END

BLOCK MOVE void delay(unsigned int count)

BLOCK EXCHANGE
{
BLOCK MOVE BLOCK EXCHANGE
unsigned int i, j;
ORG 00H ORG 00H
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
ORG
MOV00H
R2,#04H ORG 00H
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
MOV R2,#04H
MOV
MOVR2,#04H } MOV
MOVR2,#04H

mm
R0,#20H R0,#20H
Assembly Language Programs
MOV
MOV
MOVR0,#20H
R1,#30H MOVR0,#20H
R1,#30H
BLOCK MOVE BLOCK EXCHANGE

coo
MOV
UP: R1,#30H MOV
UP: R1,#30H
ORG 00H ORG 00H
UP: UP: MOV A,@R0
MOV A,@R0
MOV R2,#04H MOV R2,#04H
MOV
MOVA,@R0 MOVMOV
R0,#20H
A,@R0

p.c.
MOV R0,#20H
@R1,A XCH A,@R1
MOV R1,#30H MOVXCH
R1,#30H
A,@R1
MOV
INC @R1,A
R0 XCH
MOV A,@R1
@R0,A
UP:
uup
UP:
INC
INCR0R1 MOVMOV
INC @R0,A
A,@R0
R0
MOV A,@R0
XCHINC
A,@R1
roro
INC R1 R2,UP
DJNZ INCR0R1
MOV @R1,A
MOV @R0,A
INC R0
DJNZ
ENDR2,UP INC R1 R2,UP
INC DJNZ
R0
stsgg

INC R1
END INCDJNZ
R1 R2,UP
END
DJNZ R2,UP DJNZ
ENDR2,UP
I/P:
END END
I/P: I/P:
I/P I/P
I/P:
nnt
dee

   O/P:
O/P:
O/P
uud
sst t

     
Continued...
O/P:
tiyty

O/P:
 tu
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 101

ys
ADDITION
ADDITIONOFOF
TWO 16-BIT
TWO 16-BIT NUMBERO/P: SUBTRACTION
NUMBER SUBTRACTION OFOF
TWO 16-BIT
TWO 16-BIT
(MULTIBYTE
(MULTIBYTEADDITION)
ADDITION) O/P NUMBER
NUMBER(MULTIBYTESUBTRACTION)
(MULTIBYTESUBTRACTIO
ADDITION OF TWO 16-BIT NUMBER SUBTRACTION OF TWO 16-BIT

t
ADDITION OF TWO 16-BIT NUMBER SUBTRACTION OF TWO 16-BIT
(MULTIBYTE ADDITION) NUMBER (MULTIBYTESUBTRACTION)

i
(MULTIBYTE
ORG 00H ADDITION) NUMBER ORG(MULTIBYTESUBTRACTIO
00H
MOV
ORG
ORG 00H
MOVR7,#02H
00HR7,#02H
ORG 00H
. c MOV
ORG
ORG 00H
MOVR7,#02H
00H R7,#02H
ORG 00H
w
MOV MOVR0,#20H
R7,#02H MOV R0,#20H
R7,#02H
MOV R0,#20H
R7,#02H MOV
MOV R0,#20H
R7,#02H
MOV R1,#40H
R0,#20H MOV R1,#40H
R0,#20H
w

MOV R1,#40H

c coo
MOV R0,#20H    MOV
MOV R1,#40H
R0,#20H
UP:MOV R1,#40H
UP:MOV R1,#40H UP:MOV R1,#40H
UP:MOV R1,#40H

p.p.c..c
ADDITION OF TWO 16-BIT NUMBER SUBTRACTION OF TWO 16-BIT
w

UP:MOV A,@R0 UP:MOV A,@R0

(MULTIBYTE
UP:MOV ADDITION)
A,@R0 NUMBER (MULTIBYTESUBTRACTION)
UP:MOV A,@R0
ORGADDC
00H
MOV A,@R1
A,@R0 ORG 00H
SUBB A,@R1

ououuupp
ADDC A,@R1 MOV A,@R0
SUBB A,@R1
MOV A,@R0 MOV A,@R0
MOVMOV
R7,#02H
@R1,A MOV R7,#02H
ADDCMOV A,@R1 MOV
SUBB @R1,A
A,@R1
ADDC@R1,A
MOV R0,#20H A,@R1 MOV
MOV R0,#20HSUBB@R1,A
A,@R1
MOVINC
MOV R0
INC@R1,A
R1,#40HR0@R1,A MOV R1,#40H
INC
MOV R0
INC@R1,A
R0@R1,A

grgrorro
MOV MOV
UP: INCINCR1
R0 UP: INC R1
R0
INC R1
MOV A,@R0 R0 MOV A,@R0INC
INC R1
R0
DJNZ
ADDC R1R7,UP
INCA,@R1
DJNZ R7,UP SUBB DJNZ
A,@R1 R1R7,UP
INCDJNZ
MOVJNC
DJNZ
tsstsgsg
$581.80$5*
INC R1
@R1,A
NOCARRY
R7,UP
JNC NOCARRY
INC R0DJNZ R7,UP
INC
JNC R2
NOCARRY
INC R1JNC NOCARRY
INC R2
MOV @R1,A
INC R0
JNC
DJNZ
INC
JNC
INC R1 INC
JNC
DJNZ
R2
R7,UP
INCRanebennur.
M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, R1
NOCARRY
R7,UP
NOCARRY
R7,UP
NOCARRY
JNCR2
enennnt t
NOCARRY
NOCARRY: DJNZ
MOV
INCR7,UP
NOCARRY: MOV R2A,R2
A,R2 DJNZ
NOCARRY: R7,UP
MOV
INC R2A,R2
INC R2 NOCARRY: MOV A,R2
JNC NOCARRY JNC NOCARRYINC R2
NOCARRY: MOV @R1,A
A,R2 NOCARRY: MOV @R1,A
A,R2
ududddee

INC R2MOV
NOCARRY: MOV@R1,A
A,R2 INC R2 MOV
NOCARRY: MOV@R1,A
A,R2
NOCARRY: MOVEND
MOVA,R2
END@R1,A NOCARRY: MOV A,R2
END
MOVEND@R1,A
MOV @R1,A MOV @R1,A
I/P:I/P: MOVEND@R1,A MOV @R1,A
I/P:I/P: END
END END END END
ststuttu

I/P: I/P:
I/P I/P: I/P I/P:
ityiytysys

 
 
 
 
.c citit


 

w .c..c

 

       
O/P: O/P: 
O/P:
O/P 
w www

O/P O/P:
O/P: O/P:
O/P: O/P:
wwwww

     
ww
 ORG
Hexadecimal to00H
Hexadecimal BCD
to BCD ORG
BCD 00H
BCD
to Hexadecimal
to Hexadecimal
ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV A,30H MOV A,20H
102 MOV A,30H MOV A,20H 8051 Microcontroller
ORG
MOV
ORG
00H00H
B,#0AH ORG ORG
00H00H
MOV B,#10H
MOV B,#0AH MOV B,#10H
MOV MOV
A,30H
DIV A,30H
AB MOV MOV
A,20H
DIV A,20H
AB
DIV AB DIV AB
Hexadecimal
MOV to BCD
B,#0AH
B,#0AH BCD to Hexadecimal
MOV 33H,B MOV MOV B,#10H
B,#10H
R2,B
MOV 33H,B
ORG 00H ORG 00HR2,B
MOV
DIVMOV
DIV
AB AB
B,#0AH DIV
AB AB
DIVMOV B,#0AH
MOV A,30H MOV B,#0AH MOV
MOVA,20H
B,#0AH
MOV MOV
33H,B
33H,B
MOV B,#0AH DIVDIV AB
AB MOV
MOV
MUL
MOV
MUL
B,#10H
AB
R2,B
R2,B
AB
DIV AB MOV MOV
B,#0AH
B,#0AH
32H,B DIV
MOVAB
MOV
ADD B,#0AH
B,#0AH
A,R2
MOV 32H,B ADD A,R2
MOV 33H,B DIVDIV AB AB
MOV 31H,A MOV
MULR2,B
MUL
AB AB
MOV 31H,A MOV 21H,A
MOV B,#0AH MOV 21H,A
MOV B,#0AH
MOV MOV
32H,B
END 32H,B ADD ADD
A,R2
END A,R2
DIV AB END MUL
ENDAB
MOV MOV
31H,A
31H,A MOV MOV 21H,A
21H,A
MOV 32H,B ADD A,R2
I/P: ENDEND I/P:ENDEND
MOV 31H,A
I/P: I/P: MOV 21H,A
END END
I/P I/P:I/P: I/P
I/P:I/P:

   O/P:   
O/P: O/P:
O/P O/P:
O/P

O/P:O/P: O/P:O/P:
     

BCD to ASCII ASCII to BCD

ORG 0000 ORG 0000H
MOV A,30H MOV A,30H
ANL A,#0F0H SUBB A,#30H
SWAP A SWAP A
ADD A,#30H MOV R2,A
MOV 31H,A MOV A,31H
MOV A,30H SUBB A,#30H
ANL A,#0FH ADD A,R2
ADD A,#30H MOV 32H,A
MOV 32H,A END
END
Continued...

 Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.

 M.Tech,M.Tech,
Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
 MOV
ADD MOV 32H,A
32H,A
A,#30H END
END
MOV 32H,A
ADD A,#30H MOV 32H,A
END
MOV END 32H,A END
MOV 32H,A END
END
8051 Stack, I/O Port END
Interfacing and Programming 103
I/P:I/P: I/P:I/P:

I/P
I/P: I/P:
I/P
I/P: I/P:

  
O/P:   
O/P O/P: O/P:
O/P O/P:
O/P:
O/P: O/P:
O/P:
  
  

LOGIC GATES HALF ADDER

AND, NAND, OR & NOR
ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV C,P1.7 MOV C,P1.7
ANL C,P1.6 ANL C,/P1.6
MOV P1.5,C MOV P1.5,C
CPL C MOV C,P1.7
MOV P1.4,C CPL C
MOV C,P1.7 ANL C,P1.6
ORL C,P1.6 MOV P1.4,C
MOV P1.3,C ORL C,P1.5
CPL C MOV P1.3,C
MOV P1.2,C MOV C,P1.7
END ANL C,P1.6

 Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
M.Tech,
MOV P1.2,C
 M.Tech, Lecturer
ENDin E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
 M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
I/O: I/O:
–– ––– – –
A B Y=AB Y=AB Y=A+B Y=(A+B) A B C=AB S=AB+AB
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0
104 8051 Microcontroller

XOR GATE XOR NOR GATE

ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV C,P1.7 MOV C,P1.7
ANL C,/P1.6 CPL C
MOV P1.5,C ANL C,/P1.6
MOV C,P1.7 MOV P1.5,C
CPL C MOV C,P1.7
ANL C,P1.6 ANL C,P1.6
MOV P1.4,C MOV P1.4,C
ORL C,P1.5 ORL C,P1.5
MOV P1.3,C MOV P1.3,C
END END
I/O: I/O:
– – –––
A B S=AB+AB A B S=AB +AB
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 0

ASCENDING DESCENDING
ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV R7,#03H MOV R7,#03H
MAIN: MOV R0,#30H MAIN: MOV R0,#30H
MOV R6,#03H MOV R6,#03H
UP: MOV A,@R0 UP: MOV A,@R0
INC R0 INC R0
MOV B,@R0 MOV B,@R0
CJNE A,B,NEXT CJNE A,B,NEXT
NEXT: NEXT:
JC NOEXCHANGE JNC NOEXCHANGE
MOV @R0,A MOV @R0,A
DEC R0 DEC R0
MOV @R0,B MOV @R0,B
INC R0 INC R0
NOEXCHANGE: NOEXCHANGE:
DJNZ R6,UP DJNZ R6,UP
DJNZ R7,MAIN DJNZ R7,MAIN
END END
Continued...
 DJNZ R7,MAIN DJNZ
DJNZR7,MAIN
R7,MAIN
DJNZ
DJNZ R6,UP
R6,UP DJNZ
DJNZR6,UP
R6,UP
END
END END
DJNZ R7,MAIN END
DJNZ R7,MAIN
DJNZ R7,MAIN DJNZ R7,MAIN
END
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing
END and Programming END
END 105
I/P:
I/P: I/P:
I/P:
SERIALCOMMUNICATION
SERIAL COMMUNICATION SERIALCOMMUNICATION
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
I/P:
I/P:I/P I/P I/P:
I/P:
ORG00H
ORG 00H ORG00h
ORG 00h
MOVTMOD,#20H
MOV TMOD,#20H MOVTMOD,#20h
MOV TMOD,#20h
     
O/P: MOVTH1,#-3
MOV TH1,#-3 MOVTH1,#-3
MOV TH1,#-3
O/P
O/P: O/P O/P:
O/P:
MOVSCON,#50H
MOV SCON,#50H MOVSCON,#50h
MOV SCON,#50h
O/P:
O/P: O/P:
SETBTR1
SETB TR1 O/P: SETBTR1
SETB TR1
   UP:MOV
UP: MOVA,A,#'S'
#'S'    REPEAT:
REPEAT:
ACALL SEND
ACALLSEND
SERIAL COMMUNICATION MOVDPTR,
SERIAL MOV DPTR,#msg
#msg
COMMUNICATION
ORG 00H MOV
MOVA,A,#'T'
#'T' ORG 00h
UP:CLR
UP: CLRAA
MOV TMOD,#20H
ACALLSEND
ACALL SEND MOV TMOD,#20h
MOVCA,@A+DPTR
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
MOV TH1,#-3 MOV TH1,#-3
MOVA,A,#'J'
MOV #'J' JZ REPEAT
JZ REPEAT
MOV SCON,#50H MOV SCON,#50h
SEND
ACALLSEND
SETB TR1 ACALL SETB TR1ACALL SEND
ACALLSEND


UP: MOV A, #'S'
Lecturer in
M.Tech, Lecturer
#'I'M.Tech,
MOVA,A,#'I'
E&CE
REPEAT:
in Dept.
E&CE S.T.J.I.T,
Dept. Ranebennur.
S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
MOV INCDPTR
INC DPTR
ACALL SENDACALL SEND MOV DPTR, #msg

ACALL SEND
 M.Tech, Lecturer inin
E&CE Dept. SJMPUP
SJMP
S.T.J.I.T, UP
Ranebennur.
MOV A, #'T' M.Tech, UP: CLR A
Lecturer E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
MOVA,A,#'T'
MOV #'T'
ACALL SEND MOVC A,@A+DPTR
MOV A, #'J'
ACALL SEND
ACALLSEND REPEAT
JZ SEND:
SEND:
ACALL SEND
SJMP UP
SJMPUP ACALL SEND
MOVSBUF,A
MOV SBUF,A
MOV A, #'I' INC DPTR
HERE:JNB
HERE: JNBTI, HERE
TI,HERE
ACALL SEND SJMP UP
MOV A, #'T' SEND: CLRTITI
CLR
ACALL
SENDSEND
SEND: :MOV
MOVSBUF,
SBUF,AA MOV SBUF,A
RET
RET
SJMP UP JNB
HERE:
HERE: JNBTI, HERE
TI,HERE HERE:JNB TI, HERE
CLR TI
CLRTITI
CLR msg:db
msg: db"STJIT",0
"STJIT",0
SEND:MOV SBUF, A RET
RET
HERE:JNB TI, RET
HERE msg: db "RYMEC",0
END
END
CLR TI END
END END
RET
END
O/P:
O/P: O/P:
O/P:
O/P O/P
RYMECRYMEC
RYMECRYMEC
      RYMECRYMEC
106 8051 Microcontroller

SERIAL COMMUNICATION SERIAL COMMUNICATION

(Refer after reading Module-4) (Refer after reading Module-4)
ORG 00H ORG 00h
MOV TMOD, #20H MOV TMOD,#20h
MOV TH1, #-3 MOV TH1,#-3
MOV SCON, #50H MOV SCON,#50h
SETB TR1 SETB TR1
UP: MOV A, #'G' REPEAT:
ACALL SEND MOV DPTR, #msg
MOV A, #'M' UP: CLR A
ACALL SEND MOVC A,@A+DPTR
MOV A, #'I' JZ REPEAT
ACALL SEND ACALL SEND
MOV A, #'T' INC DPTR
ACALL SEND SJMP UP
SJMP UP SEND:
SEND: MOV SBUF, A MOV SBUF,A
HERE: JNB TI, HERE HERE: JNB TI, HERE
CLR TI CLR TI
RET RET
END msg: db "GMIT",0
END
O/P O/P

       

TIMER DELAY PROGRAM TIMER DELAY PROGRAM

(Refer after reading Module-4) (Refer after reading Module-4)
ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV TMOD, #01H MOV TMOD, #01H
AGAIN: AGAIN:
MOV TL0,#3EH MOV TL0,#00H
MOV TH0,#0B8H MOV TH0,#00H
CPL P1.7 CPL P1.7
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
SJMP AGAIN SJMP AGAIN
Continued...
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 107

DELAY: DELAY:
SETB TR0 SETB TR0
HERE: JNB TF0, HERE HERE: JNB TF0, HERE
CLR TR0 CLR TR0
CLR TF0 CLR TF0
RET RET
END END
O/P O/P

       
COUNTERS
HEX-UP COUNTER HEX-UP COUNTER
(Refer after reading Module-4)
ORG 00H ORG 00H
UP: UP:
MOV P1,A MOV P1,A
INC A INC A
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
SJMP UP SJMP UP

DELAY: DELAY:
MOV R0,#60H MOV TL0,#00H
MOV R1,#0FFH MOV TH0,#00H
MOV R2,#0FFH SETB TR0
BACK: HERE: JNB TF0,HERE
DJNZ R2,BACK CLR TR0
DJNZ R1,BACK CLR TF0
DJNZ R0,BACK RET
RET END
END
108 8051 Microcontroller

HEX-DOWN COUNTER HEX-DOWN COUNTER

(Refer after reading Module-4) (Refer after reading Module-4)
ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV A,#0FFH MOV A,#0FFH
UP: UP:
MOV P1,A MOV P1,A
DEC A DEC A
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
SJMP UP SJMP UP

DELAY: DELAY:
MOV R0,#60H MOV TL0,#00H
MOV R1,#0FFH MOV TH0,#00H
MOV R2,#0FFH SETB TR0
BACK: HERE: JNB TF0,HERE
DJNZ R2,BACK CLR TR0
DJNZ R1,BACK CLR TF0
DJNZ R0,BACK RET
RET END
END

DECIMAL-UP COUNTER DECIMAL-UP COUNTER

(Refer after reading Module-4)
ORG 00H ORG 00H
UP: UP:
MOV P1,A MOV P1,A
ADD A,#01H ADD A,#01H
DAA DAA
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
SJMP UP SJMP UP
DELAY: DELAY:
MOV R0,#60H MOV TL0,#00H
MOV R1,#0FFH MOV TH0,#00H
MOV R2,#0FFH SETB TR0

..... Continued
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 109

BACK: HERE: JNB TF0,HERE

DJNZ R2,BACK CLR TR0
DJNZ R1,BACK CLR TF0
DJNZ R0,BACK RET
RET END
END

DECIMAL-DOWN COUNTER DECIMAL-DOWN COUNTER

(Refer after reading Module-4)
ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV A,#99H MOV A,#99H
UP: UP:
MOV P1,A MOV P1,A
ADD A,#99H ADD A,#99H
DAA
DAA
ACALL DELAY
ACALL DELAY
SJMP UP
SJMP UP
DELAY:
DELAY:
MOV R0,#60H
MOV TL0,#00H
MOV R1,#0FFH
MOV TH0,#00H
MOV R2,#0FFH
SETB TR0
BACK:
HERE: JNB TF0,HERE
DJNZ R2,BACK
CLR TR0
DJNZ R1,BACK
CLR TF0
DJNZ R0,BACK
RET
RET
END
END

SQUARE OF A GIVEN NUMBER CUBE OF A GIVEN NUMBER

ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV A,20H MOV A,20H
MOV B,A MOV B,A
MUL AB MUL AB
MOV 21H,B MOV 21H,A
MOV 22H,A MOV 22H,B
END MOV A,20H
..... Continued
 MOV B,22H
MOV
 MOV B,21H
22H,B
O/P: MOV 22H,A MOV B,22H
MUL AB
MUL
I/P:O/P: MOVAB
A,20H
END MUL AB
MOV 25H,A
110
 MOV B,21H 8051 Microcontroller
MOV 23H,A
MOV 25H,A
MOV 26H,B
MOV
I/P: MUL 24H,B
AB
I/P MOV MOV 26H,B
B,21HMOV 32H,23H
MOV
MOV A,20H
23H,A
MUL AB MOV 32H,23H
MOV A,24H
MOV
MOV MOV B,22H
23H,A 24H,B
  
O/P: MOV A,24H
MOV 24H,BADD A,25H
MUL
MOVAB
A,20H
O/P
MOV A,20HMOV
ADD A,25H
Cube I/O: MOV 31H,A
MOV 25H,A
B,22H
Cube I/O: MOV B,22HMOV 31H,A
O/P: MOV A,26H
   I/P: MUL AB MOV
MUL 26H,B
AB
MOV A,26H
CubeI/P:
I/O MOV 25H,AADDC A,#00H
MOV
MOV 32H,23H
25H,A
I/P MOV 26H,BADDC A,#00H
MOV 30H,A
MOV
MOV MOV A,24H
32H,23H26H,B
MOV 30H,A
MOV A,24HEND
ADD
MOVA,25H
32H,23H
  
O/P: ADD A,25HEND
Cube I/O:
O/P O/P:
MOV
MOV
MOV 31H,A
31H,A
A,24H

I/P: MOV A,26H

MOV
ADD A,26H
A,25H
ADDC A,#00H
   Cube I/O: ADDC A,#00H
MOV 31H,A
MOV 30H,A
MOV
MOV 30H,A
A,26H
I/P: END
END
ADDC A,#00H
16-BIT MULTIPLICATION MOV A,21H
O/P:ORG 00H MOV B,23H
 MOV 30H,A
M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
MOV A,20H MUL AB
 M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
END
MOV B,22H MOV 36H,A
O/P:
MUL AB MOV 37H,B
MOV 30H,A MOV 43H,30H
MOV 31H,B MOV A,31H
MOV A,20H ADD A,32H
MOV B,23H JNC go
 M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
MUL AB INC R0
MOV 32H,A go: ADD A,34H
MOV 
33H,B go1S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
JNCDept.
Lecturer in E&CE
M.Tech,
MOV A,21H INC R0
MOV B,22H go1: MOV 42H,A
MUL AB MOV A,33H
MOV 34H,A ADD A, R0
MOV 35H,B
..... Continued
 MOV
MOV34H,A
B,23H MOV 40H,A
MOV 34H,A I/P:END
MOV
MUL35H,B
AB
MOV 35H,B END
MOV A,21H
MOV 36H,A
8051 Stack, I/O Port Interfacing and Programming 111
MOVMOV A,21H
B,23H
MOV 37H,B I/P:
MULMOVAB B,23H I/P:
JNC go2 MOV
MOVMUL
43H,30H
AB
36H,A I/P
INC R1 MOV A,31H Intermediate O/P:
MOVMOV37H,B
36H,A
go2: ADD A,35H ADD A,32H
MOV 43H,30H
MOV 37H,B   
JNC go3JNC go
MOV A,31H Intermediate
Intermediate O/P
O/P:
INC R1 MOV 43H,30H
INC A,32H
ADD R0 
go3: ADD A,36H MOV A,31H Intermediate O/P:
ADDgoA,34H
go: JNC
JNC go4 ADD A,32H   
INC R0GO1 
INC R1 JNC JNC go O/P:
go: ADD
go4: MOV 41H,A R0 INC A,34H O/P
INC R0 
MOVgo1: JNC GO1
A,37H O/P:
MOV 42H,A
go: ADD
INC R0 A,34H
ADD A,R1   
MOVgo1:
JNC
MOV
40H,A
GO1
42H,A O/P:
END INC R0
go1: MOV 42H,A
BYTE 
LEVEL LOGICAL M.Tech, Lecturer in MOV
E&CE37H,A
Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
OPERATION MOV A,20H
 M.Tech, Lecturer in E&CE Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
ORG 00H RR A
MOV A,20H MOV 38H,A
 M.Tech, Lecturer inMOV
ANL A,21H E&CEA,20H
Dept. S.T.J.I.T, Ranebennur.
MOV 32H,A RL A
MOV A,20H MOV 39H,A
ORL A,21H END
MOV 33H,A
MOV A,20H
XRL A,21H
MOV 34H,A
MOV A,20H
CPL A
MOV 35H,A
MOV A,20H
CLR A
MOV 36H,A
MOV A,20H
SWAP A
112 8051 Microcontroller

Appendix
A.1 Introduction to Embedded C and its applicability to 8051
• The use of C language to program microcontrollers is becoming too common
and most of the time it’s not easy to build an application in assembly which
instead you can make easily in C. So it’s important to know C language for
microcontroller which is commonly known as Embedded C.
• The conventional ‘C’ language and its extensions are used for programming
embedded systems, it is referred to as “Embedded C Programming”.
• Embedded “C” can be considered as a subset of conventional “C” language.
• A software program called “Cross compiler” is used for the conversion of
programs written in Embedded “C” to target processor / controller specific
instructions.
• The “C” is the most common embedded language and almost 80% of embedded
applications are coded in “C”.
• With 8051 microcontroller we are going to use Keil C51 Compiler, hence we
also call it Keil C.

Compiler
Compiler is a software tool that converts a source code written in a high level language
on top of a particular operating system running on a specific target processor
architecture.

Cross Compiler
Cross compiler are software tools used in cross platform development applications. In
cross platform development, the compiler running on a particular target processor /
OS converts the source code to machine code for a target processor whose architecture
and instruction set are different from the current development environment (OS).

Keywords
These are the reserved names used by the “C” language. All the keywords should be
written in lowercase letters. ANSI “C” support 32 such keywords.
Examples: int, char, float, void, while, for, long etc.

Pros and Cons of using 8051 C

Advantages of programming in ‘C’ for 8051 microcontroller
1. Programming in ‘C’ is easier to write programs in ‘C’ than assembly language.
2. Programming in ‘C’ is easier to modify and update.
Appendix 113

3. C code is portable to other microcontroller with little or no modification.

4. Programming in ‘C’ allows using library functions such as sqrt, sine, scanf,
printf etc.
5. Programming in C’’ is less time consuming.

Disadvantages of programming in ‘C’ for 8051 microcontroller

1. Assembly language programs have fixed size for the HEX files produced, whereas
for the same ‘C’ programs, different ‘C’ compiler produces different HEX code
sizes.
2. The 8051 general purpose registers such as R0-R7, A & B are under the control
of the ‘C’ compiler and are not accessed by ‘C’ statements.
3. It is difficult to calculate exact delay for ‘C’ programs.
4. Microcontroller has limited on-chip ROM and the code space. A misuse of data
types by the programmer in writing ‘C’ programs can lead to a large size HEX
files.
For example: Using int data type (16-bit) instead of unsigned char (8-bit) can
lead to a large size HEX files. This problem does not arise in assembly language
programs.

General structure of embedded C program

The first line in an 8051 C program is #include <reg51.h>. The library file
reg51.h contains the definition of all the special function registers and their bits. Let
us write a simple C program:
Write an 8051 C program to send values 00H -0FFH to port P1

#include <reg51.h> // contains all the port registers and internal

// RAM of 8051declared
void main (void)
{
unsigned char x; // x is allotted a space of 1 byte
for (x=0; x<=255;x++)
P1=x; // values 00H-0FFH sent to port 1
}

The values 00H to 0FFH will be displayed on port 1.

114 8051 Microcontroller

A.2 Data Types
The data types of 8051 are
1. unsigned char
• Since 8051 is an 8-bit microcontroller and the character data type is also
8-bit. So char data type is most widely used in 8051 C.
• The unsigned char is an 8-bit data type that takes a value in the range of 0
to 255 i.e. 00H to FFH.
• Used for setting a counter value, to represent ASCII character etc.
2. signed char
• The signed char is an 8-bit data type that uses the Most Significant Bit (MSB)
D7 to represent +ve or –ve value.
• So only 7-bits are used to represent the magnitude of the number.
• The signed char ranges from -128 to +127.
• Used to represent quantity having –ve values such as Temperature etc.
3. unsigned int
• The unsigned int is a 16-bit data type that ranges from 0 to 65635 (0000H
to FFFFH).
• The unsigned int is used to define a 16-bit variables such as memory
addresses. It is also used to set counter values of more than 256.
• Since 8051 is an 8-bit microcontroller so the int data type takes two bytes
of RAM. The misuse of int variables will result in a larger HEX file.
4. signed int
• The signed int is a 16-bit data type that uses the MSB i.e. D15 bit to represent
+ve or –ve value.
• So, only 15-bits are used to represent the magnitude of the number.
• The signed int ranges from -32,768 to +32,767.
• Used to represent +ve or – ve values.
5. sbit
• The sbit keyword is used to access single bit addressable registers.
• It allows access to the single bit of the SFR registers.
• Its size is 1-bit i.e. either 0 or 1
6. bit
• The bit data type allows to access single bit of bit-addressable memory
spaces 20H to 2FH.
• Its size is 1-bit i.e. either 0 or 1.
Appendix 115

7. sfr
• The sfr data type is used to access the byte-size SFR registers.
• Its size is 8-bits i.e. 1 byte.
• RAM addresses 80H to FFH are used.

Note: T
 he C compilers use the signed char and signed int as the default if we do
not put the keyword unsigned in front of the char and int.
Table A.1: Data types in 8051

Data Type Size in Bits Data Range/Usage

unsiged char 8-bit 0 to 255

signed char 8-bit –128 to +127

unsigned int 16-bit Oto 65535

signed int 16-bit –32,768 to+32,767

sbit 1-bit SFR bit-addressable only

bit 1-bit RAM bit-addressable only

sfr 8-bit RAM addresses 80–FFH only

C Programs

unsigned char
Example A.1:
Write an 8051 C program to send values 00H - 0BBH to port P3
Solution:

#include <reg51.h> 1. Pay careful attention to the

void main (void) size of the data
{ 2. Try to use unsigned char
instead of int if possible
unsigned char i;
for (i=0; i<0xBB;i++)
P3=i;
}
116 8051 Microcontroller

Example A.2:
Write an 8051 C program to send hex values for ASCII characters of 0, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, A, B, C, D and F to port P1.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned char mynums[]=“012345ABCDF”;
unsigned char i;
for (i=0;i<11;i++)
P1=mynums[i];
}
Example A.3:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of P2 continuously.
Solution:
//Toggle P2 forever
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{ for (;;)
{
P2=0xAA;
P2=0x55;
}
}

signed char
Example A.4:
Write an 8051 C program to send values of –3 to +3 to port P1.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
charmynums[]={+1,-1,+2,-2,+3,-3};
unsigned char i;
Appendix 117

for(i=0;i<6;i++)
P1=mynums[i];
}
Note: T
 he negative values will be displayed in the 2’s complement for as –1 = FFH,
–2 = FEH, –3 = FDH, –4 = FCH and so on.

unsigned int
Example A.5:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle bit D0 of the port P0 (i.e. P0.0) 50,000
times.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
sbit MYBIT=P0^0;
void main(void)
{
unsigned int i;
for (i=0;i<50000;i++)
{
MYBIT=0;
MYBIT=1;
}
}

Example A.6:
Write in 8051 C program to toggle bits of PI continuously forever with
some delay.
Solution:
# include <reg51.h>
void main (void)
{
unsigned int x;
for (;;)
{
Pl=0x55;
for (x=0;x<40000;x++) ; //time delay
Pl=0xAA;
for (x=0;x<40000;x++);
118 8051 Microcontroller

}
}

signed int
Example A.7:
Write an 8051 C program to send values of –5 to +5 to port P1.

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
int mynums[]={+1,-1,+2,-2,+3,-3,+4,-4,+5,-5};
unsigned char i;
for(i=0;i<10;x++)
P1=mynums[i];
}
The negative values will be displayed in the 2’s complement.

single bit
Example A.8:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle bit D0 of the port P0 (P0.0) 50,000
times.

Solution:

#include <reg51.h>

sbit MYBIT=P0^0; sbit keyword allows access to the

void main(void) single bits of the SFR registers
{
unsigned int z;
for (i=0;i<50000;i++)
{
MYBIT=0;
MYBIT=1;
}
}
Appendix 119

Example A.9:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle only bit P0.1 continuously without
disturbing the rest of the bits of P0.

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
sbit mybit=P0^1;
void main(void)
{
while (1)
{
mybit =0; // turn on P0.1
mybit =1; // turn off P0.1
}
}

A.3 Time Delay generation

There are two ways to create a time delay in 8051 C:
1. Using a simple for loop
2. Using the 8051 timers

Time-delay generation using loops

To create time delay,three factors that can affect the accuracy of the delay
1. The instruction execution speed varies according to the number of clock periods
per machine cycle i.e. different versions of microcontroller uses different machine
cycles to execute instructions.
Example: T
 he 8051 uses 12 clock periods per machine cycle and newer generation
microcontrollers uses fewer clocks per machine cycle.
2. The crystal frequency connected to the XTAL1 and XTAL2 input pins.
3. Compiler Selection.
 compiler converts the C statements and functions to assembly language
C
instructions. Different compilers produce different code.
Note:
• In assembly language programming, delay generated can be controlled by the user,
as the number of instructions and the cycles per instructions are known.
• In case of C program, the C compiler will convert the C statements and functions
120 8051 Microcontroller

to assembly language instructions. Thus, different compilers produce different

delays.

Machine cycles and clock frequency for 8051

In 8051, time for one machine cycle is 12 oscillator periods i.e. 12d.
The frequency of the crystal connected to the 8051 family can vary from 4 MHz
to 30 MHz. But, the 11.0592 MHz crystal oscillator is used to make the 8051 based
system compatible with the serial port.

Formulae
1 1
1. Clock Period = = = 0.090 µs
Clock frequency 11.0592 × 106

2. Time of one machine cycle

Clock period × 12d = 0.090 µs × 12 = 1.085 µs
3. Time delay provided for one machine cycle
Number of Machine cycles × Time for one machine cycle = 1 × 1.085 µs = 1.085 µs
Note:
1. The for loop i.e. for(i=0; i<1275; i++) executed on 8051 microcontroller ( 12
clock per machine cycle) with a standard crystal frequency of 11.0592 MHz
produces a time delay of approximately 12 ms.
2. The for loop i.e. for(i=0; i<1275; i++) executed on DS89C420 microcontroller
( 1 clockper machine cycle) with a standard crystal frequency of 11.0592
MHz produces a time delay of approximately 1ms.

Example A.10:
The 8051 microcontroller uses a clock frequency of 11.0592 MHz.
Calculate
i) Clock period ‘T’
ii) Time of one machine cycle.
iii) Time delay provided by AAH machine cycles.

Solution:
1 1
Clock
i) Clock ‘T’ ==
Period
period = == 0.090
0.09 µµs
s
Clock frequency 11.0592 × 106

ii) Time of one machine cycle = 0.09 µs × 12 = 1.085 µs

iii) Time delay provided by AAH = (170)10 machine cycle is
1.085 µs × 170 machine cycles = 184.45 µs
Appendix 121

Example A.11:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle bits of P0 continuously forever with
some delay.

Solution:
//Toggle P0 forever with some delay in between “on” and “off”
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned int x;
for (;;) //repeat forever or while (1)
{
P0=0x55;
for (x=0;x<1275;x++); //1 ms delay
P0=0xAA;
for (x=0;x<1275;x++); //1 ms delay
}
}

Example A.12:
Write a 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of P0 and P1 continuously
with a 1 ms delay. Use XTAL = 11.0592 MHz.

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
voidmain(void)
{
unsigned int x;
while(1) //repeat forever
{
P0=0x55;
P1=0x55;
for(x=0;x<1275;x++); //1ms delay
122 8051 Microcontroller

P0=0xAA;
P1=0xAA;
for (x=0;x<1275;x++); //1ms delay
}
}

Example A.13:

Write a 8051 C program to generate a square wave of 50% duty cycle with
Ton = Toff = 500 ms.

Solution:
TON
Duty cycle =
TON + TOFF

For 50% duty cycle, TON = TOFF = 500 ms

C Program
#include<reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main( )
{while (1) //repeat continuously
{
P0^1=0; //make P0.1 pin low
delay(500); //call delay subroutine with a parameter of 500
P0^1=1; //make P0.1 pin high
delay(500); //call delay subroutine with a parameter of 500
} //end of while
} //end of main
void delay (unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i, j;
for(i=0; i<count; i++) //outer loop repeated count times
for(j=0; j<1275; j++); //inner loop for 1 ms delay
}
Appendix 123

Example A.14:
Write a 8051 C program to generate a square wave of 75% duty cycle with
T =400 ms on pin P0.4.

Solution:
T = 400 ms
Duty cycle = 75% = 0.75
Ton Ton
Duty cycle = =
T 400ms
Ton =400 × 0.75 = 300 ms
Toff = T – Ton = 400 – 300 = 100 ms.

C Program
include <reg51.h>
void delay (unsigned int);
void main
{ while(l)
{
P0^4=1;
delay(300);
P0^4=0;
delay(l00);
}
}
void delay (unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for(i=0; i<count; i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}

Example A.15:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle bits of P1 ports continuously with a
250ms.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main(void)
124 8051 Microcontroller

{
while (1) //repeat forever
{
P1=0x55;
delay(250);
P1=0xAA;
delay(250);
}
}
void delay (unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}

Example A.16:
Write an 8051 C program to get a byte of data from P1, wait ½ second,
and then send it to P2.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main(void)
{
unsigned char mydata;
P1=0xFF; //make P1 input port
while (1) // repeat forever
{
mydata=P1; //get a byte from P1
delay(500);
P2=mydata; //send it to P2
}
Appendix 125

}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i, j;
for (i=0; i<count; i++)
for (j=0; j<1275; j++);
}

A.4 Accessing SFRs and bit addressable RAM

• Another way to access the SFR RAM space 80H to FFH is to use the sfr data
type. When this data type is used no need of using the header file reg51.h.
• Also, we can access a single bit of any SFR by specifying the bit address as
shown in table A.2.
• The bit and byte addresses for the P0 to P3 ports are given in the table A.2

Table A.2: single bit addresses of ports.

P0 Addr P1 Addr P2 Addr P3 Addr Port's Bit

P0.0 80H P1.0 90H P2.0 A0H P3.0 B0H D0
P0.l 81H P1.1 91H P2.1 A1H P3.1 B1H D1
P0.2 82H P1.2 92H P2.2 A2H P3.2 B2H D2.
P0.3 83H P1.3 93H P2.3 A3H P3.3 B3H D3
P0.4 84H P1.4 94H P2.4 A4H P3.4 B4H D4.
P0.5 85H P1.5 95H P2.5 A5H P3.5 B5H D5
P0.6 86H P1.6 96H P2.6 A6H P3.6 B6H D6
P0.7 87H P1.7 97H P2.7 A7H P3.7 B7H D7

Example A.17:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of P0, P1 and P2
continuously with a 250 ms delay. Use the sfr keyword to declare the port
addresses.

Solution:

//Accessing Ports as SFRs using sfr data type

126 8051 Microcontroller

sfr P0=0x80;
sfr P1=0x90;
Another way to access the SFR RAM space
sfr P2=0xA0;
80 - FFH is to use the sfr data type
void delay(unsigned int);
void main(void)
{
while (1)
{
P0=0x55;
P1=0x55;
P2=0x55;
delay(250);
P0=0xAA;
P1=0xAA;
P2=0xAA;
delay(250);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned inti, j;
for (i=0; i<count; i++)
for (j=0; j<1275; j++);
}

Example A.18:
Write an 8051 C program to turn bit P1.5 on and off 50,000 times.
Solution:

sbit MYBIT=0x95;
void main(void) We can access a single bit of any SFR if
{ we specify the bit address
unsigned int i;
for (i=0;i<50000;i++)
{
MYBIT=1;
MYBIT=0;
}
}
Appendix 127

Notice that there is no #include <reg51.h>. This allows us to access any byte
of the SFR RAM space 80-FFH. This is widely used for the new generation of
8051 microcontrollers.

bit addressable I/O

Example A.19:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle only bit P2.5 continuously without
disturbing the rest of the bits of P2.
Solution:

//Toggling an individual bit

#include <reg51.h> Ports P0-P3 arc bit-addressable

and we use sbit data type to
access a single bit of P0-P3.
sbit mybit=P2^5;
void main(void) Use the Px^y format, where x is
{ the port 0, 1,2, or 3 and y is the
while (1) bit 0 - 7 of that port
{
mybit=1; //turn on P2.5
mybit=0; //turn off P2.5
}
}

Example A.20:
Write an 8051 C program to monitor bit P0.5. If it is high, send AAH to
P1; otherwise, send FFH to P3.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
sbit mybit=P0^5;
void main(void)
{
mybit=1; //make mybit an input
while (1)
{
128 8051 Microcontroller

if (mybit==1)
P1=0xAA;
else
P3=0xFF;
}
}

Example A.21:
Write an 8051 C program to get the status of bit P1.1, save it, and send
it to P0.1 continuously.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
sbit inbit=P1^1;
sbit outbit=P0^1;
bit membit; //use bit to declare
//bit- addressable memory
void main(void)
We use bit data type to access data
{ in a bit-addressable section of the
while (1) data RAM space 20 - 2FH
{
membit=inbit; //get a bit from P1.1
outbit=membit; //send it to P0.1
}
}

Example A.21:
The data pins of an LCD are connected to P1. The information is latched
into the LCD whenever its Enable pin goes from high to low. Write an 8051
C program to send "RYMEC Engineering College Ballari" to this LCD.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
#define LCDData P1 //LCDData declaration
sbit En=P2^0; //the enable pin
void main(void)
{
unsigned char message[]= "RYMEC Engineering College Ballari";
Appendix 129

unsigned char z;
for (z=0;z<33;z++) //send 33 characters
{
LCDData=message[z];
En=l; //a high-
En=0; //-to-low pulse to latch data
}
}

A.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators

Arithmetic operators
The arithmetic operators in 8051 C are Additioin (+), Subtraction (-), Multiplication (*)
and Division (/) and are shown in table A.3
Table A.3 Arithmetic Operators in C
Operator Description Example
+ Adds two operands. A + B = 30
− Subtracts second operand from the first. A − B = 10
* Multiplies both operands. A ∗ B = 200
∕ Divides numerator by de-numerator. A ∕ B = 2

Note: A=20 & B=10

Example A.22:
Write a C program to understand all the arithmetic operators available
in 8051 C.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned char A=20;
unsigned char B=10;
P1=A + B;
P1=A - B;
P1=A * B;
P1=A / B;
}
130 8051 Microcontroller

Bit-wise Logic Operators in C

™™ Explain the different logical operators available in 8051C. 5 Marks
The 8051 C language also has several bitwise operators. The Bitwise operators affect
a variable on a bit-by-bit basis. These bit-wise operators are widely used in software
engineering for embedded systems and control.
Table A.3: 8051 C Bit-wise Logic Operators
Operator Description
& Bitwise AND
| Bitwise OR
~ Bitwise NOT (1 s Compliment)
^ Bitwise Exclusive OR
<< Shift Left
>> Shift Right

Table A.4: Bit-wise Logic Operation on bit variables.

AND OR EX-OR Inverter
A B A&B A | B A^B Y=~B
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 –
1 1 1 1 0 –
The following shows some examples using the C logical operators.
1. 0x35 & 0x0F = 0x05 /* ANDing */
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
& 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

Result is 00000101b = 05H

2. 0x04 | 0x68 = 0x6C /* ORing */
3. 0x04 ^ 0x78 = 0x2C /* XORing */
4. ~0xAA = 0x55 /* Inverting AAH */
The bitwise operators are used to
i) Turning bits ON: Turn ON a particular bit by ORing with a 1.
ii) Turning bits OFF: Turn OFF a particular bit by ANDing with a 0.
Appendix 131

iii)Toggling bits: Turning a bit OFF to ON or ON to OFF by EXCLUSIVELY ORing

with a 1.

Bit-wise shift operators in C

There are two bit-wise shift operators in 8051 C: shift right (>>) and shift left (<<).
The formats of bit-wise shift operators are as follows
data >> number of bits to be shifted right
data << number of bits to be shifted left
The following shows some examples of shift operators in 8051 C
1. 0x9A >> 3 = 0x13 /* shifting right 3 times */
2. 0x66 >> 4 = 0X06 /* shifting right 4 times */
3. 0x05 << 4 = 0x50 /* shifting left 4 times */

Example A.23:
The following program will explain the different logical operations. We
can run on simulator and examine the results.

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
P0=0x35 & 0x0F; //ANDing
P1=0x04 | 0x68; //ORing
P2=0x54 ^ 0x78; //XORing
P0=~0x55; //inversing
P1=0x9A >> 3; //shifting right 3
P2=0x77 >> 4; //shifting right 4
P0=0x6 << 4; //shifting left 4
}
Example A.24:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of P0 and P1 continuously
with a 300ms delay. Using the inverting and Ex-OR operators,
respectively.
132 8051 Microcontroller

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main(void)
{
P0=0x55;
P1=0x55;
while (1)
{
P0=~P0;
P1=P1^0xFF;
delay(300);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for(i=0; i<count; i++)
for(j=0; j<1275;j++);
}

Example A.25:
Write an 8051 C program to get bit P1.2 and send it to P2.3 after
inverting it.
Write a C program to read P1.2 and send it to P2.3 after inverting it.
5 Marks
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
sbit inbit=P1^2;
sbit outbit=P2^3;
bit membit;
void main(void)
{
while (1)
Appendix 133

{
membit=inbit; //get a bit from P1.2
outbit=~membit; //invert it and send
//it to P2.3
}
}

Example A.26:
Write an 8051 C program to read the P1.0 and P1.1 bits and issue an
ASCII character to P0 that is if P1.1 and P1.0 is 00 send ‘0’ if 01 send
‘1’, if 10 send ‘2’ and if 11 send ‘3’.

 Algorithm
1. Make P1 as input port.
2. Read P1 value.
3. Mask all bits except D0 & D1 of P1 and put the masked value in x.
4. If x=0; send ‘0’ to P0, else if x=1; send ‘1’ to P0, else if x=2; send ‘2’ to P0, else
send ‘3’ to P0. (use switch statement).
5. Repeat from step 2.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned char z;
z=P1; //read P1
z=z&0x3; //mask the unused bits
switch (z) //make decision
{
case(0):
{
P0=‘0’; break; //send ASCII 0
}
case(1):
134 8051 Microcontroller

{
P0=‘1’; break; //send ASCII 1
}
case(2):
{
P0=‘2’; break; //send ASCII 2
}
case(3):
{
P0=‘3’; break; //send ASCII 3
}
}}

Accessing Code ROM Space in 8051 C

Using ROM to Store Data

• To make C compiler use the code space (on-chip ROM) instead of RAM space,
we can put the keyword "code" in front of the variable declaration.
unsigned char mydata[] = "HELLO"
ff HELLO is saved in RAM.
code unsigned char mydata[] = "HELLO"
ff HELLO is saved in ROM.

Example A.27:
Compile and single-step the following program on your 8051 simulator.
Examine the contents of the 128-byte RAM space to locate the ASCII
values.

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned char mynum[]=“RYMEC”; //RAM space
unsigned char z;
for (z=0;z<=5;z++)
P1=mynum[z];
}
Appendix 135

Example A.28:
Write, compile and single-step the following program on your 8051simulator.
Examine the contents of the code space to locate the values.

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main (void)
{
unsigned char mydata[100]; //RAM space
unsigned char x, i=0;
for (x=0;x<100;x++)
{ i++;
mydata [x]=i;
P0=i;
}
}

Example A.29:
Compile and single-step the following program on your 8051simulator.
Examine the contents of the code space to locate the ASCII values.
Solution:
To make the C compiler use the
code space instead of the RAM
#include <reg51.h> space, we need to put the keyword
void main(void) code in front of the variable
{ declaration
code unsigned char mynum[]="GMIT DAVANGERE";
unsigned char i;
for (i=0;i<14;i++)
P1=mynum[i];
}

Example A.30:
Compare and contrast the following programs and discuss the advantages
and disadvantages of each one.
i)     #include <reg51.h>
Void main (void)
{
136 8051 Microcontroller

P1 = “H”;
P1 = “E”;
P1 = “L”;
P1 = “L”;
P1 = “O”;
}
Solution:
Short and simple.
 he individual character is embedded into the program and it mixes the
T
code and data together. Thus, it’s not flexible.
ii)    #include <reg51.h>
Void main (void)
{
unsigned char mydata [ ] = “HELLO”;
unsigned char z;
for (z=0; z<5; z++)
P1 = mydata [z];
}
Solution:
 he Array elements are stored in RAM, therefore the size of the array is
T
limited.
iii)
#include <reg51.h>
Void main (void)
{
code unsigned char mydata [ ] = “HELLO”;
unsigned char z;
for (z=0; z<5; z++)
P1 = mydata [z];
}

Solution:
 se a separate area of the code space for data. This allows the size of the
U
array to be as long as you want if you have the on-chip ROM.
 owever, the more code space you use for data, the less space is left for
H
your program code.
Appendix 137

Example A.31:
 rite an 8051 C program to convert packed BCD 0x29 to ASCII and display
W
the bytes on P1 and P2.
™™ Write
 a 8051 C program to convert packed BCD to ASCII and to display it
on P1 and P2 5 Marks

Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned char x,y,z;
unsigned char mybyte=0x29;
x=mybyte&0x0F;
P1=x|0x30;
y=mybyte&0xF0;
y=y>>4;
P2=y|0x30;
}

Example A.32:
Write an 8051 C program to convert ASCII digits ‘4’ and ‘7’ into packed
BCD and to display on port P1. 5 Marks
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
unsigned char bcdbyte;
unsigned char w=‘4’;
unsigned char z=‘7’;
w=w&0x0F;
w=w<<4;
z=z&0x0F;
bcdbyte=w|z;
P1=bcdbyte;
}
138 8051 Microcontroller

Example A.33:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of P0 for every 500ms
i)   by using NOT operator
ii) by using EX-OR operator

Solution

i) By using NOT operator

#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main(void)
{
P0=0x55;
while(1)
{
P0=~P0;
delay(500);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int itime)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for (i=0;i<itime;i++)
for (j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
ii) By using EX-OR operator
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main(void)
{
P0=0x55;
while(1)
{
P0 = P0 ^ 0xFF;
Appendix 139

delay(500);
}
}

void delay(unsigned int itime)

{
unsigned int i,j;
for (i=0;i<itime;i++)
for (j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
 4
8051 Timers and Serial Port

4.1 Introduction
The 8051 has two16-bit timers/counters, they can be used either as
• Timers to generate a time delay or
• Event counters to count events happening outside the microcontroller.
The two timers are
i) Timer/Counter T0 and   ii) Timer/Counter T1
T0 T1

TH0 TL0 TH1 TL1

8 bit 8 bit 8 bit 8 bit

Fig.4.1.1: Timer 0 & Timer 1

• Each register can be used either for Timer or counter and can be divided into Two
8-bit registers called Timer Low (TL) and Timer High (TH) as shown in Fig. 4.1.1.
• Both timers 0 and 1 use the same register, called TMOD (timer mode), to set
the various timer operation modes.
• TCON is a bit-addressable 8-bit register used for timer control.

4.1.1 Timer 0 register

TH0 TL0

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Fig.4.1.2: Timer 0 register

140
8051 Timers and Serial Port 141

• The 16-bit register of Timer 0 is accessed as low byte and high byte.
• The low byte register is called TL0 and the high byte register is called TH0.
• These registeres can be accessed like any other registers such as A, B, R0 to
R7 etc.
Example:
MOV TLO, # 55H ; Move the value 55H into TL0 register
MOV R1, TL0 ; Copy the content of TL0 into R1 register.

4.1.2 Timer 1 register

TH1 TL1

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Fig.4.1.3: Timer 1 register

• The 16-bit register of Timer 1 is accessed as low byte and high byte.
• The low byte register is called TL1 and the high byte register is called TH1.
• These registeres can be accessed like any other registers such as A, B, R0 to R7 etc.

Example:
MOV TH1, # 55H ; Move the value 55H into TH1 register
MOV R1, TH1 ; Copy the content of TH1 into R1 register.

4.2 TMOD (Timer Mode) Register

• Timer 0 & Timer 1 use the same register, called TMOD, to set the various timer
operation modes.
• TMOD is an 8-bit register in which, the lower 4 bits are for Timer 0 and the
upper 4 bits are for Timer 1.
(MSB) (LSB)
– –
GATE C/T M1 M0 GATE C/T M1 M0
Timer 1 Timer 0

Fig.4.2.1: TMOD register

For Timer 1
Bit 7: Gate (Gating control)
––––
• When Gate=1, the Timer/Counter 1 is enabled only when INT1 pin is high (p 3.3)
––––
and the TR1 control bit is high (i.e. Gate = INT1 = TRI = 1).
142 8051 Microcontroller

• When Gate=0, theTimer/Counter 1 is enabled whenever the TR1 control bit is

––––
set (i.e. Gate=TR1=1 & regardless of the State of INT1 pin).
–
Bit 6: C/T (Timer or Counter selected)
–
• When C/T = 0, Timer mode selected.In Timer mode, Timer 1 will increment
every machine cycle.
–
• When C/T = 1,counter mode selected.In counter mode, Timer1 will count
events (pulses) on T1 pin (P3.5).

Bit 5 & 4:M1 & M0 (Mode bit 1 & Mode bit 0)

T1M1 T1M0 Mode Descriptioni

0 0 0 13 - bit timer
0 1 1 16 - bit timer
1 0 2 8 - bit auto reload
1 1 3 Split mode

For Timer 0
Bit 3:Gate (Gating control)
––––
• When Gate = 1, the Timer/Counter 0 is enabled only when I NT0 pin is high
––––
(p3.2) and the TR1 control bit is high (i.e. Gate = I NT0 =TR0 = 1).
• When Gate =0, the Timer/Counter 0 is enabled whenever the TR0 control bit is
––––
set (i.e. Gate=TR0 = 1 & regardless of the State of I NT0 pin).
–
Bit 2: C/T (Timer or Counter selected)
–
• When C/T = 0, Timer mode selected. In Timer mode, Timer 0 will increment
every machine cycle.
–
• When C/T =1, counter mode selected. In counter mode, Timer 0 will count
events (pulses) on T0 pin (P3.4).

Bit-1 & 0: M1 & M0 (Mode bit 1 & Mode bit 0)

T1M1 T1M0 Mode Descriptioni

0 0 0 13 - bit timer
0 1 1 16 - bit timer
1 0 2 8 - bit auto reload
1 1 3 Split mode
8051 Timers and Serial Port 143

Note:
• The only difference between Timer/counter is the sources of the clock pulses.
When used as a timer, the clock pulses are sourced from the oscillator through
the divide by 12-d circuit.
• When used as a counter, Pin T0 (P3.4) supplies pulses to counter 0, & Pin T1
(P3.5) supplies pulses to counter1.

Note:
• TMOD register configuration for Timer 0/1 in Mode 1 & Mode 2.

Table 4.2.1: TMOD register configuration

TMOD
Timer & Mode TMOD Register
value

TIMER 1 TIMER 0
– –
GATE C/T M1 M0 GATE C/T M1 M0
Timer 0, Mode 1 × × × × 0 0 0 1 01H

Timer Mode 1

TIMER 1 TIMER 0
– –
GATE C/T M1 M0 GATE C/T M1 M0
Timer 1, Mode 1 0 0 0 1 × × × × 10H

Timer Mode 1

TIMER 1 TIMER 0
– –
GATE C/T M1 M0 GATE C/T M1 M0
Timer 0, Mode 2 × × × × 0 0 1 0 02H

Timer Mode 2 of
operation operation

TIMER 1 TIMER 0
– –
GATE C/T M1 M0 GATE C/T M1 M0
Timer 1, Mode 2 0 0 1 0 × × × × 20H

Timer Mode 2 of
operation
144 8051 Microcontroller

Example 4.1:
Find the values of TMOD to operate as timers in the following modes.
(a) Mode 1 Timer 1   (b) Mode 2 Timer 0, Mode 2 Timer 1   
(c) Mode 0 Timer 1

Solution
(a) TMOD is 00010000 = 10H
–
     The gate control bit and C/T bit are made 0, and the unused timer (Timer
0 bit is also 0)
(b) TMOD is 01010010 = 52H
(c) TMOD is 00000000H = 00H

Example 4.2:
Indicate which mode and which timer are selected for each of the
following
(a) MOV TMOD, #01H    (b) MOV TMOD, #20H    (c) MOV TMOD, #12H

Solution:
We convert the value from hex to binary
(a) TMOD = 00000001, mode 1 of timer 0 is selected.
(b) TMOD = 00100000, mode 2 of timer 1 is selected.
(c) TMOD = 00010010, mode 2 of timer 0, and mode 1 of timer 1 are selected.

Example 4.3:
Find the timer’s clock frequency and its period for various 8051-based
–
system, with the crystal frequency 11.0592 MHz when C/T bit of TMOD is
0.

Solution:
XTAL
÷ 12
oscillator

Fig. 4.2.2: Divide by 12 circuit

We know that in 8051, XTAL oscillator frequency is divide by 12 circuit as shown in
figure 5.2.2.
1
Frequency f = × 11.0592 MHz = 921.6 KHz
12
1 1
Time T = = = 1.085 µs
f 921.6 KHz
8051 Timers and Serial Port 145

Machine Cycle
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
One machine cycle
6 states, 12 pulses

Fig. 4.2.3: Machine cycle

In 8051, two pulses constitute a state and machine cycle is made up of six
states. Some instructions may require more than one machine cycle.
The time required to execute an instruction is given by
C × 12d
T=
f
Where, T is the time for instruction to be executed
f is the crystal frequency and
C is the number of machine cycles.

Example 4.4:
For 8051 microcontroller, find the time taken for an instructions which takes
i) 1 Machine cycle   ii) 2 Machine cycles   iii) 4 Machine cycles
Solution:
C × 12d 1 × 12
i) T= = = 1.085 µSec
f 11.0592 × 106
C × 12d 2 × 12
ii) T= = = 2.170 µSec
f 11.0592 × 106
C × 12d 4 × 12
iii) T= = = 4.340 µSec
f 11.0592 × 106

4.2.1 TCON Register (Timer Control Register)

MSB                                                                           LSB
TF1 TR1 TF0 TR0 IE1 IT1 IE0 IT0

Fig.4.2.4:TCON register.
• TCON (timer control) register is a bit-addressable 8-bit register.
• The upper four bits (bit 4 to bit 7) are used to store the TF and TR bits of both
timer 0 & 1.
146 8051 Microcontroller

• The lower four bits (bit 0 to bit 3) are set aside for controlling the interrupt bits.
Bit Bit Name Bit Function
Timer 1 Overflow flag.
TF1=1, when timer 1 register overflows.
7 TF1
TF1=0, when processor vectors to execute interrupt service routine
located at program address 001Bh.
Timer 1 run control bit. Set/Cleared by software.
6 TR1 TR1=1, enable timer to count.
TR1=0, halt timer.
Timer 0 Overflow flag.
TF0=1, when timer 0 register overflows.
5 TF0
TF0=0, when processor vectors to execute interrupt service routine
located at program address 000Bh.
Timer 0 run control bit. Set/Cleared by software.
4 TR0 TR0=1, enable timer to count.
TR0=0, halt timer.
External interrupt 1 Edge flag.
Set to 1 when a high-to-low edge signal is received on port 3.3
––––
3 IE1 ( I N T1).
Cleared when processor vectors to interrupt service routine at
program address 0013h. (Not related to timer operations).

External interrupt 1 signal type control bit.

Set to 1 by program to enable external interrupt 1 to be triggered
2 IT1 by a falling edge signal.
Set to 0 by program to enable a low-level signal on external interrupt
1 to generate an interrupt.

External interrupt 0 Edge flag.

Set to 1 when a high-to-low edge signal is received on port 3.2
1 IE0 ––––
( I NT0). Cleared when processor vectors to interrupt service routine
at program address 0003h. (Not related to timer operations).
External interrupt 0 signal type control bit.
Set to 1 by program to enable external interrupt 1 to be triggered
0 IT0 by a falling edge signal.
Set to 0 by program to enable a low-level signal on external interrupt
0 to generate an interrupt.
8051 Timers and Serial Port 147

Note: The instructions used for Timer Control Registers (TCON)

Table 5.2.2: Instructions for TCON registers

For Timer 0
SETB TR0 SETB TCON 4
CLR TR0 CLR TXON 4
SETB TF0 CLR TCON 5
CLR TF0 CLR TCON 5
For Timer 1
SETB TR1 SETB TCON 6
CLR TR1 CLR TCON 6
SETB TF1 SETB TCON 7
CLR TF1 CLR TCON 7

4.3 Timer Modes

• In 8051,timer can operate in any one of four modes: Mode 0, Mode 1, Mode 2
& Mode 3.
• The M1 & M0 bits in TMOD register determines the type of mode.
–
• The C/T = 0, Timer mode selected.

4.3.1 Timer in Mode1

The following are the characteristics and operations of mode1:
1. It is a 16-bit timer; therefore, it allows value of 0000 to FFFFH to be loaded into
the timer’s register TL and TH
2. After TH and TL are loaded with a 16-bit initial value, the timer must be started.
This is done by SETB TR0 for timer 0 and SETB TR1 for timer 1
3. After the timer is started, it starts to count up.
ff It counts up until it reaches its limit of FFFFH.
ff When it rolls over from FFFFH to 0000, it sets high a flag bit called TF
(timer flag).Each timer has its own timer flag: TF0 for timer 0, and TF1
for timer 1.This timer flag can be monitored
ff When this timer flag is raised, one option would be to stop the timer
with the instructions CLR TR0 or CLR TR1, for timer 0 and timer 1,
respectively
148 8051 Microcontroller

4. After the timer reaches its limit and rolls over, in order to repeat the process.
The registers TH and TL must be reloaded with the original value, and TF must
be reset to 0.

imer 0 in Mode1
™™ Explain the operation of timer0 in mode 1 5-Marks

XTAL
÷12 TH0 TL0 TF0
oscillator
– TF0 goes high Overflow
C/T = 0 TR0 flag

Fig.4.3.1: Block diagram of Timer 0 in Mode 1

–
Note: C/T = 0, TMOD = 01H & TCON =10H

Steps to program Timer 0 in Mode 1

1. Load the TMOD register with 01H to operate in Timer 0 in Mode 1
2. Load registers TL0 and TH0 with initial count value (16-bit value i.e. 0000H to
FFFFH)
3. Start the Timer 0 by setting TR0 in TCON register (SETB TR0)
4. Timer 0 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFFFH
and it rolls over to 0000H. Now it will set the TF0 bit in TCON register.
Keep monitoring TF0 with the “JNB TF0, here” instruction until TF0 is set.
5. Stop the Timer 0 (Set TR0=0)
6. Clear TF0 flag for the next round.
7. Go back to Step 2 to load TH0 and TL0 again.

Timer 1 in Mode1

XTAL
÷12 TH1 TL1 TF1
oscillator
– Overflow
C/T = 0 TR1 flag

Fig.4.3.2: Block diagram of Timer 1 in Mode 1

–
Note: C/T = 0, TMOD = 10H & TCON = 40H

Steps to program Timer 1 in Mode 1

1. Load the TMOD register with 10H to operate in Timer 1 in Mode 1
8051 Timers and Serial Port 149

2. Load registers TL1 and TH1 with initial count value (16-bit value i.e. 0000H to
FFFFH)
3. Start the Timer 1 by setting TR1 in TCON register (SETB TR1)
4. Timer 1 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFFFH
and it rolls over to 0000H. Now it will set the TF1 bit in TCON register.
Keep monitoring TF1 with the “JNB TF1, here” instruction until TF1 is set.
5. Stop the Timer 1 (Set TR1=0)
6. Clear TF1 flag for the next round.
7. Go back to Step 2 to load TH1 and TL1 again.
4.3.2 Timer in Mode 2
The following are the characteristics and operations of mode 2:
1. It is an 8-bit timer; therefore, it allows only values of 00 to FFH to be loaded
into the timer’s register TH.
2. After TH is loaded with the 8-bit value, the 8051 gives a copy of it to TL
Then the timer must be started. This is done by the instruction SETB TR0 for
timer 0 and SETB TR1 for timer 1.
3. After the timer is started, it starts to count up by incrementing the TL
register.
ff It counts up until it reaches its maximum.
ff When it rolls over from FFH to 00, it sets high the TF (timer flag).
4. When the TL register rolls from FFH to 0 and TF is set to 1, TL is reloaded automati-
cally with the original value kept by the TH register.
• To repeat the process, we must simply clear TF and let it go without any need
by the programmer to reload the original value.
• This makes mode 2 an auto-reload, in contrast with mode 1 in which the
programmer has to reload TH and TL.

4.3.2.1 Timer 0 in Mode 2

XTAL Overflow
÷12 TL0 TF0
oscillator flag
–
C/T = 0 TR0 TF0 goes high
Reload when FF 0
TH0

Fig.4.3.3: Block diagram of Timer 0 in Mode 2

–
Note: C/T = 0, TMOD = 02H & TCON = 10H
150 8051 Microcontroller

Steps to program Timer 0 in Mode 2

1. Load the TMOD register with 02H to operate in Timer 0 in Mode 2.
2. Load initial values into TH0 register (8-bit value i.e. 00H to FFH). The TH0
content is automatically copied into TL0 register.
3. Start the Timer 0 by setting TR0 in TCON register (SETB TR0)
4. Timer 0 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFH and
it rolls over to 00H. Now, it will set the TF0 bit in TCON register and the TL0
is reloaded automatically with the initial value (i.e. TH0 value).
Keep monitoring TF0 with the “JNB TF0, here” instruction until TF0 is set.
5. Clear TF0 flag for the next round.
6. Go back to Step 4, since mode 2 is auto-reload.

Timer 1 in Mode 2
1. Load the TMOD register with 20H to operate in Timer 0 in Mode 2.
2. Load initial value into TH1 register (8-bit value i.e. 00H to FFH). The TH1
content is automatically copied into TL1 register.

XTAL Overflow
÷12 TL1 TF1
oscillator flag
–
C/T = 0 TR1 TF goes high
Reload when FF 0
TH1
Fig.4.3.4: Block diagram of Timer 1 in Mode 2
–
Note: C/T = 0, TMOD = 20H & TCON = 40H

Steps to program Timer 1 in Mode 2

3. 2 Start the Timer 1 by setting TR1 in TCON register (SETB TR1)
4. Timer 1 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e.
FFH and it rolls over to 00H. Now, it will set the TF1 bit in TCON
register and the TL1 is reloaded automatically with the initial value
(i.e. TH1 value).
Keep monitoring TF1 with the “JNB TF1, here” instruction until TF1 is set.
5. Clear TF1 flag for the next round.
6. Go back to Step 4, since mode 2 is auto-reload.

4.4 Counter Mode

–
• In 8051,Timer / counter can be used as an event counter by setting C/T =1 in
TMOD register.
8051 Timers and Serial Port 151

• In counter mode, the source of clock pulse is from external source.

• For Counter 0 clock pulse is fed through T0 (P 3.4) and Counter 1 clock pulse
is fed through T1 (P 3.5).

8051

TH0
P1
TL0

P3.4
a switch T0

Fig. 4.4.1: Block diagram of Counter

4.4.1 Counter 0 in Mode1

Timer 0
Overflow
external TH0 TL0 TF0
flag
input P in
TR0 TF0 goes high
3.4
when FFFF 0
–
C/T = 0
Fig.4.4.2: Block diagram of Counter 0 in Mode 1

–
Note:   C/T =1, TMOD = 05H & TCON =10H

Steps to program Counter 0 in Mode 1

1. Load the TMOD register with 05H to operate in Counter 0 in Mode 1.
2. Load registers TL0 and TH0 with initial count value (16-bit value i.e. 0000H
to FFFFH)
3. Start the Counter 0 by setting TR0 in TCON register (SETB TR0)
4. Counter 0 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFFFH
and it rolls over to 0000H. Now it will set the TF0 bit in TCON register.
Keep monitoring TF0 with the “JNB TF0, here” instruction until TF0 is set.
5. Stop the Counter 0 (Set TR0=0)
6. Clear TF0 flag for the next round.
7. Go back to Step 2 to load TH0 and TL0 again.
152 8051 Microcontroller

4.4.2 Counter 1 in Mode 1

Timer 1
external TH1 TL1 TF1
input P in Overflow
TR1 TF1 goes high
3.5 flag
when FFFF 0
–
C/T = 1
Fig.4.4.3: Block diagram of Counter 1 in Mode 1
–
Note: C/T = 1, TMOD = 50H & TCON = 40H
Steps to program Counter1 in Mode 1
1. Load the TMOD register with 50H to operate in Counter1 in Mode 1.
2. Load registers TL1 and TH1 with initial count value (16-bit value i.e. 0000H to FFFFH)
3. Start the Counter1 by setting TR1 in TCON register (SETB TR1)
4. Counter1 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFFFH
and it rolls over to 0000H. Now it will set the TF1 bit in TCON register.
    Keep monitoring TF1 with the “JNB TF1, here” instruction until TF1 is set.
5. Stop the Counter1 (Set TR1=0)
6. Clear TF1 flag for the next round.
7. Go back to Step 2 to load TH1 and TL1 again.

Counter 0 in Mode 2

Timer 0 Overflow
TL0 TF0
external flag
input P in TR0 TF goes high
3.4 Reload
when FF 0
– TH0
C/T = 1

Fig.4.4.4: Block diagram of Counter 0 in Mode 2

–
Note: C/T = 1, TMOD = 06H & TCON = 10H
Steps to program Counter 0 in Mode 2
1. Load the TMOD register with 06H to operate in Counter 0 in Mode 2.
2. Load initial value into TH0 register (8-bit value i.e. 00H to FFH). The TH0
content is automatically copied into TL0 register.
3. Start the Counter 0 by setting TR0 in TCON register (SETB TR0)
8051 Timers and Serial Port 153

4. Counter 0 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFH
and it rolls over to 00H. Now, it will set the TF0 bit in TCON register and the
TL0 is reloaded automatically with the initial value (i.e. TH0 value).
Keep monitoring TF0 with the “JNB TF0, here” instruction until TF0 is set.
5. Clear TF0 flag for the next round.
6. Go back to Step 4, since mode 2 is auto-reload.
Counter 1 in Mode 2

Timer 0 Overflow
TL1 TF1
external flag
input P in TR1 TF goes high
3.5 Reload
when FF 0
– TH1
C/T = 1
Fig.4.4.5: Block diagram of Counter 1 in Mode 2
–
Note: C/T = 1, TMOD = 60H & TCON = 40H
Steps to program Counter1 in Mode 2
1. Load the TMOD register with 60H to operate in Counter1 in Mode 2.
2. Load initial value into TH1 register (8-bit value i.e. 00H to FFH). The TH1
content is automatically copied into TL1 register.
3. Start the Counter1 by setting TR1 in TCON register (SETB TR1)
4. Counter1 started and it counts until it reaches its maximum value i.e. FFH and
it rolls over to 00H. Now, it will set the TF1 bit in TCON register and the TL1
is reloaded automatically with the initial value (i.e. TH1 value).
Keep monitoring TF1 with the “JNB TF1, here” instruction until TF1 is set.
5. Clear TF1 flag for the next round.
6. Go back to Step 4, since mode 2 is auto-reload.

Difference between timers and counters

Sl No TIMER COUNTER
– –
1 C/T = 0 C/T = 1
Timers are used to generate time Counters are used to count the events
2
delay. that occur outside the 8051.
For counter operation externals clock
For timer operation clock pulses are
3 pulses are applied to pin P3.4 (T0)
provided by crystal oscillator circuit.
and P3.5 (T1).
154 8051 Microcontroller

The register is incremented in

Timer register incremented for every response to a 2 to 0 transition at its
4
machine cycle. corresponding to external input pin
(T0,T1).

A counter accumulates an unknown

A timer accumulates series events of quantity of external events over
a known interval over an interval that a known interval of time. The
is being measured. The measurement measurement of interest is typically
5
of interest is typically the time elapsed frequency when the events are
between two events. periodic. If the events are random,
the measurement involves event
density over time.

Maximum count rate is 1/12 of Maximum count rate is 1/24 of

6
oscillator frequency. oscillator frequency.

Maximum Count Value

The maximum count value of the timers in each mode is given in the table
Table 4.4.1: Maximum count value of the timer in each mode
Maximum count value
Timer Mode Timer size Initial value
Hexadecimal (H) Decimal (d)
Mode0 13-bit 0000H 1FFFH 8191
Mode1 16-bit 0000H FFFFH 65535
Mode2 8-bit 00H FFH 255
Mode3 8-bit 00H FFH 255

FORMULAE

 12 
Time delay = [Maximum Count Value − (initial count + 1)]×  
 Crystal Frequency 

  Crystal Frequency  
Initial Count = Maximum Count Value −  Time delay ×  + 1
  12 

  12 
Maximum delay = Maximum Count Value ×  
  Crystal Frequency  
8051 Timers and Serial Port 155

Time Delay generation & example programs in assembly and C

Example 4.5:
 rite a 8051 assembly and C program to generate a delay of 12 μs using
W
Timer0 in Mode1 with XTAL frequency of 22 MHz.
Solution:
Crystal Frequency
[Initial value — 1] = Maximum value – delay ×
12
12µs × 22 MHz
= FFFFh −
12
= 65535 − 12

= 65513 (in decimals)

Initial value = 65513 +1 = 65514 = FFEAH

 he initial value (16-bit) should be loaded into the 16-bit timer register
T
THTL as TH1 = FF (MSB) and TL1 – EA (LSB).
For timer 0 in mode 1 TMOD = 01H
The initial value is loaded into Timer0 register i.e. TL0 = EAH & TH0 = FFH.

       Assembly Language Program (ALP)

ORG 00H
MOV TMOD,#01 ;Timer 0, Mode 1(16-bit mode)
HERE: MOV TL0,#0EAH ;TL0=F2H, the low byte
MOV TH0,#0FFH ;TH0=FFH, the high byte
SETB TR0 ;Start timer 0
WAIT: JNB TF0, WAIT ;Wait till TF0=1

CLR TR0 ;Stop timer 0

CLR TF0 ;Clear timer 0 flag
SJMP HERE
END

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void main ( )
{
156 8051 Microcontroller

TMOD=0x01; //Timer0, Mode1

while (1)
{
TL0=0xF2; //Initial value FFEA i.e. TL0=EAH
TH0=0xFF; //TH0=FFH
TR0=1; //Start Timer0
while(TF0==0); //Executes loop until TF0=0
//& comes out when TF0=1
TR0=0; //Stop Timer0
TF0=0; //Clear TF0 for next overflow
} // end of while
} // end of main

Example 4.6:
 rite an ALP and C program to generate 50% duty cycle on P1.1. Use
W
timer 1 in mode 1 to generate the delay. Use an initial value of FFAAH
for the timer and a crystal frequency of 11.0592 MHz. Also calculate the
frequency of square wave.

Solution:

      Assembly Language Program (ALP)

For timer 1 in mode 1 TMOD=10H
ORG 00H
MOV TMOD,#10 ;Timer 1, Mode 1(16-bit mode)
HERE: MOV TL1,#0AAH ;TL1=AAH, the low byte
MOV TH1,#0FFH ;TH1=FFH, the high byte

CPL P1.1 ;Toggle the PORT 1 pin P1.1

LCALL DELAY ;Call delay
SJMP HERE ;repeat again

DELAY: SETB TR1 ;Start timer T1

WAIT: JNB TF1, WAIT ;wait till TF1=1

8051 Timers and Serial Port 157

CLR TR1 ;stop timer 1

CLR TF1 ;clear timer 1 flag
RET ;return to main program
END

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void delay (void);
sbit pin=p1^1;
void main ( )
{
TMOD=0x10; //Tiimer1, Mode1
while (1)
{
Pin=~pin; //Toggle PORT 1 pin P1.1
TL1=0xAA; //Initial value FFAA i.e. TL1=AAH
TH1=0xFF; //TH1=FFH
}
void delay ( );
}

void delay (void)

{
TR1=1; //Start Timer1
while (TF1==0); 
//Executes loop until TF1=0 & comes out
//when TF1=1
TR1=0; //Stop Timer1
TF1=0; //Clear TF1 for next overflow
}

T1 T2

Fig.4.4.6: Square wave with 50% duty cycle.

In this example, the same delay is used for both ON time and OFF time of the
square wave i.e. T1 = T2
158 8051 Microcontroller

The time period of the square wave is T = T1 + T2

We know that T1 = T2
T = T1 + T1= 2T1 OR 2T2

The time delay is given by
12
Time Delay T1 = × ( final value − initial value + 1)
Crystal Frequency

12
= × (FFFF − FFAA + 1) = 1.085 µs × 56 H = 1.085 µs × 86 D
11.0592 M

Time Delay T1 = 93.31µs

1 1
Hence frequency of square wave 'f ' = = = 5.3584KHz
2T1 2 × 93.31µ sec
Example 4.7:
Generate a square wave with an ON time of 4 ms and an OFF time of 3 ms
on pin P1.1. Assume crystal frequency of 22 MHz. Use timer 1 in mode 1.
Solution:
In this example, the square wave has different ON time (4ms) and OFF time
(3ms), hence the intial values for ON time & OFF time are different and need to
compute separately.
Note: T
 imer 1 in mode 1 is an 16-bit mode. Therefore the maximim count value
is FFFFH.
TMOD = 10H for Timer1 in Mode 1
ON- Time initial value computation
ON - time required = 4ms = 4 × 10–3s

Hence
Crystal frequency
(Initial value − 1) = Maximum value of mode 0 − Required delay ×
12
4 × 10−3 × 22 × 106
= FFFF −
12
−3
3 × 10 × 22 MHz
= FFFFH −
12
= 65535 − 7333
= 58202 + 1
Initial value = E35BH

Load TL1 = 5BH and TH1 = E3H

8051 Timers and Serial Port 159

OFF- Time initial value computation

OFF − time required = 3 ms = 3 × 10 −3 s
Hence
Crystal frequency
(Initial value − 1) = Maximum value of mode 0 − Required delay ×
12
3 × 10−3 × 22 MHz
= FFFFH −
12
= 65535 − 5500
= 60035 + 1
Initial value = EA84H

Load TL1 = 84H and TH1 = EAH

Assembly Language Program (ALP)

ORG 00H
MOV TMOD,#10H ;Timer 1, Mode 1(16-bit mode)

HERE: MOV TL1,#5BH ;TL1=5BH, the low byte

MOV TH1,#E3H ;TH1=E3H, the high byte
SETB P1.1 ;Make pin P1.1 high
ACALL DELAY ;call delay subroutine

MOV TL1,#84H ;TL1=84H, the low byte

MOV TH1,#EAH ;TH1=EAH, the high byte
CLR P1.1 ;Make pin P1.1 low
ACALL DELAY ;call delay subroutine

SJMP HERE

DELAY: SETB TR1 ;Start Timer 1

WAIT: JNB TF1, WAIT ;wait till TF1=1
CLR TR1 ;stop timer 1
CLR TF1 ;clear timer 1 flag
RET ;return to main program
END
160 8051 Microcontroller

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void delay (void);
sbit pin=P1^1;
void main ( )
{
TMOD=0x10; //Tiimer1, Mode1
while (1)
{
TL1=0x5B; //initial value to generate 4 ms ON time
TH1=0xE3;
pin=1; //Port Pin P1.1 is made high
delay( );
TL1=0x84; // initial value to generate 4 ms ON
// time
TH1=0xEA;
pin = 0; // Port Pin P1.1 is made low
delay( );

} // end of while loop

} // end of main

Void delay (void)

{
TR1=1; //Start Timer1
while (TF1==0); 
// Executes loop until TF1=0 & comes out
when TF1=1
TR1=0; //Stop Timer1
TF1=0; // Clear TF1 for next overflow
}

Example 4.8:
Write an ALP and C program to generate a square wave of 20 KHz on pin
P2.5. Use timer 0 in mode 2 with crytal frequency of 22 MHz.
8051 Timers and Serial Port 161

Solution:

In mode 2, the timer is 8-bit with a maximum count value of FFH.

TMOD = 020H for Timer0 in Mode 2
The total time of a square wave 20 KHz
1 1
T= = = 50 × 10−6 s
f 20 KHz
T = T1 + T2 = 50 × 10 −6 s
T1 = 25 × 10−6 s and T2 = 25 × 10−6 s
Crystal frequency
(Initial value − 1) = (Maximum value of mode 2) − Required delay ×
12
22 × 106
= (FF) − 25 × 10−6 s ×
12
= 255 − 45.88 = 209 + 1 = D2H
Initial value = D2H

ORG 00H
MOV TMOD, #02H ; Timer0 in Mode 2
MOV TH0, #D2H ; Initial value loaded in TH0 register
SETB TR0 ; Start Timer 0
WAIT: JNB TF0, WAIT ; wait till TF0=1

CPL P2.5 ; Toggle the PORT 1 Pin P2.5

CLR TF0 ;clear timer 0 flag
SJMP WAIT
END

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
sbit pin=P2^5;
void main ( )
{
TMOD=0x02; //Timer0, Mode2
TH0=0xD2; // Initial value loaded in TH0 register
TR0=1; //Start Timer0
162 8051 Microcontroller

while(1)
{
pin=~pin; // toggle Port Pin P1.1
while (TF0==0); // executes loop until TF0=0 &
comes out when TF0=1
TF0=0; // Clear TF0 for next overflow
} // end of while loop
} // end of main

Example 4.9:
Assume that XTAL = 1.0592 MHz, Use timer Timer1 Mode2,
a. Generate square wave on pin P1.0 with initial value 05H and find the
frequency of the generated square wave.
b. The smallest frequency achievable in the program, and the TH value
to do that.
Solution:
a)
ORG 00H
MOV TMOD,#20h ;T1/mode 2/8-bit/auto-reload
MOV TH1, #5 ;TH1 = 5
SETB TRI ;start timer 1
BACK JNB TF1, BACK ;stay until timer rolls over
CPL P1.0 ;comp,P1.0 to get hi,lo
SJMP BACK ;mode 2 is auto reload
END
ff In mode 2, we do not need to reload TH since it is auto - reload.
Initial value = 05h
ff Since this program generates a 50% duty cycle square wave,

TON
T1
TOFF

Fig. 4.4.7: Square wave with 50% duty cycle

8051 Timers and Serial Port 163

12
Time delay = − [Max. value in Mode 2 − initial value ]
Crystal frequency
12
= − [FF(h) − 05]
11.0592 MHz
12
= [255 − 05]
11.0592 MHz
= 1.085069 7 10 −6 [250]
Time delay = 271.26 µ sec .
From the program, we know that,
TON = TOFF = 271.26 μsec

T = TON + TOFF = 271.26 μsec + 271.26 μsec

1 1
f = = = 1.83957KHz
T 544.67 µ sec
b)
To get smallest frequency, we need the largest time delay "T"
ff Maximum time delay can be achieved when initial value = 00h
Formula:
12
Maximum time delay = [Maximum value in mode 2]
Crystal frequency
12
= [FF(h)]
11.0592 MHz
= 1.085089 × 10 −6 (255d)

Max. Time delay = 276.85092 μsec

We know that, T = TON + TOFF
= 276.85 μsec + 276.85 μsec
= 553.7019 μsec and,
1 1
f= = = 1.806025 × 103 Hz
T 553.7019 µ sec

This is the smallest frequency that can be generated in Mode 2.

Example 4.10:
Assume that XTAL = 22MHz, write a program to generate a square wave
of frequency 1KHz on pin P1.2. Use timer0 in Mode2.
164 8051 Microcontroller

Solution:
XTAL = 22 MHz, f = 1 KHz on P1.2 pin
1 1
We know that, T = =
f 1 KHz
T = 1 m sec
T = TON + TOFF = 1 m sec
∴ TON = TOFF = 0.5 msec

12
   Maximum possible delay in Mode 2 = FF(h) ×
Crystal frequency
12
= 255(d) × = 0.1390909 m sec
22 MHz
But, required delay is 0.5 msec.
   So, 1st generate a delay of 0.1 msec and repeat the loop for 5 times.
i.e., 0.1 msec × 5 = 0.5 msec
0.5 m sec
counter "N " = =5
0.1 m sec

Computation of Initial volume for 0.1 msec:

 Crystal frequency 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = Max. Value in Mode 2 − Required time delay × 
 12 
 22 MHz 
= FF(h) − 0.1 m sec ×
 12 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = 255(d) − [183.33]
= 72(d) + 1 = 73(d)
Initial vlaue = 49(h)

ORG 00H
MOV TMOD,#02H ;Timer 0, mode 2
REPT: CPL P1.2 ;complement P1.2
MOV R0, #05 ;count for multiple delays
AGAIN MOV TH0,#48H ;loaf TH0 value
SETB TR0 ;start Timer 0
BACK JNB TF0, BACK ;stay until timer rolls over
CLR TR0 ;stop timer
8051 Timers and Serial Port 165

CLR TF0 ;clear timer flag

DJNZ R0, AGAIN ;repeat until R0=0
SJMP REPT ;repeat to get a train of pulses
END
Example 4.11:
Write an 8051 C program to toggle only pin P1.1 continuously every 250
ms. Use Timer 0 mode 2 to create the delay.
Solution:
Assume XTAL = 11.0592 MHz
12
Max. Possible Time delay in mode 2 = Max. value in mode 2 ×
Crystal frequency
12
= FFH × = 276.6927 µ sec
11.0592 × 106
Required time delay is greater than maximum time delay, i.e.,
250 msec > 276.6927 μsec
250 m sec
Counter "N " = = 903.52
276.692 µ sec

In the above counter value, we are getting fraction value, so, change the counter
value.
Case 1:
250 m sec
Counter "N " = = 5000
50 m sec

  1st generate a time delay of 50 msec and repeat the process for 5000 times,
i.e.,
50 μsec ×100 × 50 = 250 msec
  It can be written as, 100 × 50 = 5000
Computatioin of Initial value:
 Crystal frequency 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = Max. Value in Mode 2 − Required time delay × 
 12 
 11.0592 MHz 
= FF(h) − 50 µ sec × 
 12 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = 255(d) − 46.08 + 1
= 210(d)
Initial vlaue = D2h
166 8051 Microcontroller

Case 2:
  Counter "N " = 250 m sec = 10000
25 µ sec
"N " = 10,000
   It can be written as 250 × 40 = 10000
    i.e., 25 μsec × 250 × 40 = 250 msec
 Crystal frequency 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = Max. Value in Mode 2 − Required time delay × 
 12 
 11.0592 MHz 
= FF(h) − 25 µ sec × 
 12 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = 255(1) − 23.04 d + 1 = 233
Initial vlaue = E9h

   We can also load equivalent -ve value of E9h,

i.e., E9h= –23
#include <reg51,h>
void delay (void);
Sbit mybit=P1^5;
void main(void)
{
unsigned char x,y;
while(l)
{
mybit=~mybit; //toggle P1.5
for (x=0; x=250; x++)
for(y=0; y=40; y++)
delay();
}
}
void delay(void)
{
TMOD=0×02; //Timer0, mode 2 (8-bit auto-reload)
TH0=-23; //load TH0 (auto-reload value)
TR0=1: //turn on T0
8051 Timers and Serial Port 167

While(TF0==0); //wait for TF0 to roll over

TR0=0; //turn off T0
TF=0; //clear TF0
}

Example 4.12
Write an 8051 c program to creat a frequency of 2500 Hz on pin P2.7.
Use timer 1, mode 2 to creat the delay

Solution
1 1
T= =
F 2500 Hz
T = 0.4 m sec

T = 0.4 msec
T = TON + TOFF
T = 0.2 msec +0.2 msec

TON = TOFF= 0.2 msec 0.2 msec 0.2 msec

T = 0.4 msec TON TOFF
                                  
Fig: 4.4.9: Square wave
Computation of Initial value:
 Crystal frequency 
(Initial vlaue − 1) = Max. Value in Mode 2 − Required time delay × 
 12 
 11.0592 × 106 
= FF(h) − 0.2 m sec × 
 12 
= 255(d) − [184.32(d)] + 1
= 72(d)
Initial vlaue = 48h

       C Program
#include<reg51.h>
voidd elay (void);
sbit mybit=P2^7;
void main(void)
168 8051 Microcontroller

{
while(1)
{
mybit=~mybit; //toggle P2.7
delay();
}
}
voiddelay (void)
{
TMOD=0x20; //Timer 1, mode 2(8-bit auto-reload)
THL=-184; //load TH1(auto-reload value)
TR1=1; //turn on T1
while (TF1==0) //wait for TF1 to roll over
TR1=0; //turn off T1
TF1=0; //clear TF1
}

Example 4.13:
 ssume that 1-Hz external clock is being fed into pin T1 (P3.5). Write a
A
C program for counter 1 in mode 2 (8 -bit auto reload) to count up and
display the state of the TL1 count on P1. Start the count at 0H
Solution
include<reg51.h>
sbit Tl=P3^5;
void main(void)
{
Tl=l; //make T1 an input
TMOD=0×60;
TH0=0; //set count to 0
while(1) //repeat for ever
{
do
{
TR1=1; //start timer
8051 Timers and Serial Port 169

Pl=TL1; //place value on pins

}
while(TF0==0); //wait here
TR1=0; //stop timer
TF1=0; //clear flag
}
} 8051
1 Hz

P3.5
T1

Fig: 4.4.10: Square wave

4.5 Serial Communication

Introduction
Computers transfer data in two ways:Serial communication and Parallel
communication.
Serial communication
Serial Transfer

Sender Receiver

Fig. 4.5.1: Serial Communication

• Serial Communication use single data line to transfer data one bit at a time.
• It is used for long distance communication.
• Serial communication is slower than parallel communication.
Example: IBM keyboards transfer data to the motherboard.

Parallel communication
Parallel Transfer
D0

Sender Receiver

D7

Fig. 4.5.2: Parallel Communication

• In parallel communication, number of lines required to transfer data depends
on the number of bits to be transferred simultaneously.
170 8051 Microcontroller

• Parallel communication works only for shorter distance.

• Parallel communication is faster than serial communication.
Example: Data communication from computer to printer.
Data Transfer Rates:
• The rate of data transfer in serial communication is stated in bps (bits per
second). Another widely used terminology for bps is Baud rate.
• The baud rate & bps are not same. The baud rate is the MODEM terminology
& is defined as the number of signal changes per second.
• In modem a single change of signal sometimes transfers several bits of data.
• For conductor wire, the baud rate & bps are the same. So for this reason we
use the term bps & baud interchangeably.

Baud rate in the 8051

• The 8051 transfers & receives data serially at many different baud rates. The
baud rate in the 8051 is programmable.
• A standard crystal frequency, XTAL=11.0592 MHz is used to generate the baud rate.
• The 8051 divides the crystal frequency by 12 to get the machine cycle frequency,
i.e. XTAL/12 = 11.0592MHz/12 = 921.6 KHz.
• The 805l's serial communication UART circuitry divides the machine cycle
frequency of 921.6 KHz by 32 i.e. 921.6 KHz/32 = 28,800 Hz, then fed to the
Timerl to set the baud rate as shown in below figure 5.5.3.
11.0592 MHz
To timer 1
XTAL Machine cycle freq. ÷ 32 By 28800 Hz
+12 To set the
Oscillator 921.6 KHz UART Baud rate
Fig. 4.5.3: UART Circuitry
• The 8051 baud rate is set by Timerl using Mode 2 (8-bit auto reload).
• To get the baud rates compatible with the PC, we must load TH1 with the values
shown in below table.
Table 4.5.1: Timer 1 TH1 register values for various Baud Rates
TH1 Baud Rate
DECIMAL HEX SMOD = 0 SMOD = 1
–3 FD 9,600 19,200
–6 FA 4,800 9,600
–12 F4 2,400 4,800
–24 E8 1,200 2,400
Note: XTAL = 11.0592 MHz
8051 Timers and Serial Port 171

4.6 SCON (serial control) register

Value after
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
reset
SCON SM0 SM1 SM2 REN TB8 RB8 TI RI Bit name
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

Fig. 4.6.1: SCON Serial Port Control Register (Bit addressable)

SCON is an 8-bit register used to program the start bit, stop bit, and data bits
of data framing, among other things.
Bit Bit Name Bit Function
Serial Port Mode specifier
SM0 SM1
0 0 Serial Mode 0
7 & 6 SM0 & SM1
0 1 Serial Mode 1, 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, 1 star bit
1 0 Serial Mode 2
1 1 Serial Mode 3

5 SM2 This enables the multiprocessing capability of the 8051.

Receive Enable
It is a bit-addressable register
4 REN
When REN=1, it allows 8051 to receive data on RxD pin.
If REN=0, the receiver is disable.
Transfer bit 8
Set/Cleared by hardware to determine state of the 9th bit data
3 TB8
transmitted in 9-bit UART (In mode 2 & 3). We make TB8=0
since it is not used in our application.
Receive bit 8
Set/Cleared by hardware to indicate state of the 9th bit data
2 RB8
received -bit UART (In mode 2 & 3). We make RB8=0 since it is
not used in our application.
Transmit Interrupt
When 8051 finishes the transfer of 8-bit character
1 TI It raises TI flag to indicate that it is ready to transfer another
byte.
TI bit is raised at the beginning of the stop bit.
172 8051 Microcontroller

Receive Interrupt
When 8051 receives data serially via RxD, it gets rid of the start
and stop bits and places the byte in SBUF register
0 RI
It raises the RI flag bit to indicate that a byte has been received
and should be picked up before it is lost.
RI is raised halfway through the stop bit.

4.6.1 SBUF register

• SBUF is an 8-bit register used solely for serial communication.
• The byte data to be transmitted on the serial port (TxD line) is written into SBUF
register.
• Data is framed with the start and stop bits and transferred serially via the TxD
line.
SBUF Bit name
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Fig. 4.6.2: SBUF register
• The SBUF can be accessed like any other register in the 8051. as
MOV SBUF, #’E’ ;load SBUF=45h, ASCII for ‘E’
MOV SBUF, A ;copy accumulator into SBUF
MOV A, SBUF ;copy SBUF into accumulator
• SBUF holds the byte of data when it is received by 8051 RxD line.
• When the bits are received serially via RxD, the 8051 deframes it by eliminating
the stop and start bits, making a byte out of the data received, and then placing
it in SBUF.
• The previous data must be read before the new byte completes. Otherwise , the
old data will be lost.

4.6.2 Programming the 8051 to transfer data serially

Steps used to program 8051 to transfer data serially
1. TMOD register is loaded with the value 20H, indicating the use of timer 1 in
mode 2 (8-bit auto-reload) to set baud rate.
2. The TH1 is loaded with one of the values to set baud rate for serial data transfer.
3. The SCON register is loaded with the value 50H, indicating serial mode 1, where
an 8-bit data is framed with start and stop bits.
4. TR1 is set to 1 to start timer 1.
5. TI is cleared by CLR TI instruction.
8051 Timers and Serial Port 173

6. The character byte to be transferred serially is written into SBUF register.

7. The TI flag bit is monitored with the use of instruction “JNB TI, xx” to see if
the character has been transferred completely.
8. To transfer the next byte, go to step 5.

4.6.3 Importance of the TI flag

To understand the importance of the role of TI, look at the following sequence of steps
that the 8051 goes through in transmitting a character via TxD
1. The byte character to be transmitted is written into SBUF register.
2. The start bit is transferred.
3. The 8-bit character is transferred one bit at a time.
4. The stop bit is transferred. It is during the transfer of the stop bit that the 8051
raises the TI flag (TI=l), indicating that the last character was transmitted and
it is ready to transfer the next character.
5. By monitoring the TI flag, make sure that we are not overloading the SBUF
register. If we write another byte into SBUF register before TI is raised, the
untransmittcd portion of the previous byte will be lost. In other words, when
the 8051 finishes transferring a byte, it raises the TI flag to indicate it is ready
for the next charactcr.
6. After SBUF is loaded with a new byte, the TI flag bit must be forced to 0 by
the "CLR TI" instruction in order for this new byte to be transferred.

4.6.4 Programming the 8051 to receive data serially

In programming the 8051 to receive character bytes serially, the following steps must
be taken:
1. The TMOD register is loaded with the value 20H,. indicating the use of TIMER1
in mode 2 (8-bit auto-reload) to set the baud rate.
2. The TH1 is loaded with one of the four values to set the baud rate for serial
data transfer (Assuming XTAL=11.0592MHz).
3. The SCON register is loaded with the value 50H, indicating serial mode 1, where
an 8-bit data is framed with start and stop bits.
4. TR1 is set to 1 to start Timer 1.
5. RI is cleared by the "CLR RI" instruction.
6. The RI flag bit is monitored with the use of the transmission "JNB RI, label"
to see if an entire character has been received yet.
7. When RI is raised, SBUF has the byte. Its contents are moved into a safe place.
8. To receive the next character, go to step 5.
174 8051 Microcontroller

4.6.5 Importance of the RI flag

In receiving bits via its R×D pin, the 8051 goes through the following steps:
1. It receives the start bit indicating that the next bit is first bit of the character
byte it is about to receive.
2. The 8-bit character is received one bit at a time. When the last bit is received,
a byte it is about to receive.
3. The stop bit is received. When receiving the stop bit the 8051 makes RI = 1,
indicating that an entire character byte has been received and must be placed
up before it gets overwritten by an incoming character.
4. By checking the RI flag bit when it is raised, we know that a character has
been received and is sitting in the SBUF register. We copy the SBUF contents
to a safe place in some other register or memory before it is lost.
5. After the SBUF contents are copied into a safe place, the RI flag bit must be
forced to 0 by the "CLR RI" instruction in order to allow the next received
character byte to be placed in SBUF. Failure to do this causes loss of the
received character.

4.6.6 RS 232
Table 4.6.1: IBM PC DB-9 Signals
Pin Description
RS232 Connector DB-9 –– ––
1 Data carrier detect (DCD )
2 Received data (RxD)
3 Transmitted data (TxD)
4 Data terminal ready (DTR)
5 Signal ground (GND)
––––
6 Data set ready (DSR )
––––
7 Request to send (RTS)
––––
8 Clear to send (CTS)
9 Ring indicator (Rl)

    Fig. 4.6.3: DB-9 9-Pin Connector.

• IBM introduced the DB-9 version of the serial I/O standard.
• Current terminology classifies data communication equipment as
i) DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) refers to terminal and computers that
send and receive data.
ii) DCE (Data Communication Equipment) refers to communication equip-
ment, such as modems.
8051 Timers and Serial Port 175

Working of serial port Connecting 8051 to RS 232

The simplest connection between a PC and microcontroller requires a minimum of
three pins, TxD, RxD, and ground.

DTE DTE
T×D T×D

R×D R×D
Ground

Fig. 4.6.4: Null Modem Connection

• Many of the pins of RS-232 connector are used for handshaking signals. Their
descriptions are provided below and they are not supported by the 8051 UART chip.
• The RS-232handshaking signals are
1) DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
  When terminal is turned on, it sends out signal DTR to indicate that it is
ready for communication.
2) DSR (Data Set Ready)
   W
 hen DCE is turned on and has gone through the self-test, it assert DSR
to indicate that it is ready to communicate.
3) RTS (Request to Send)
   W
 hen the DTE device has byte to transmit, it assert RTS to signal the
modem that it has a byte of data to transmit.
4) CTS (Clear to Send)
   W
 hen the modem has room for storing the data it is to receive, it sends out
signal CTS to DTE to indicate that it can receive the data now.
5) DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
   T
 he modem asserts signal DCD to inform the DTE that a valid carrier
has been detected and that contact between it and the other modem is
established.
6) RI (Ring Indicator)
  An output from the modem and an input to a PC indicates that
the telephone is ringing. It goes on and off in synchronous with the
ringing sound.
176 8051 Microcontroller

FORMULAE
Crystal frequency 1
Baud rate = ×
12 × 32 (256 − TH1)

Crystal frequency
TH1 = 256 −
12 × 32 × Baud rate

Example 4.14:
1.  ith XTAL = 11.0592 MHz, find the TH1 value needed to have the following
W
baud rates. (a) 9600 (b) 4800 (c) 2400 (d) 1200
Solution

i) 9600 Baud Rate ii) 4800 Baud Rate

Crystal frequency
Crystal frequency TH1 = 256 −
TH1 = 256 − 12 × 32 × Baud rate
12 × 32 × Baud rate
11.0592 × 106
11.0592 × 106 TH1 = 256 − = 256 − 24 = 232
TH1 = 256 − = 256 − 3 = 253 12 × 32 × 4800
12 × 32 × 9600
TH1 = FAH
TH1 = FDH
iii) 2400 Baud Rate iv) 1200 Baud Rate
Crystal frequency Crystal frequency
TH1 = 256 − TH1 = 256 −
12 × 32 × Baud rate 12 × 32 × Baud rate
11.0592 × 106 11.0592 × 106
TH1 = 256 − = 256 − 12 = 244 TH1 = 256 − = 256 − 24 = 232
12 × 32 × 2400 12 × 32 × 1400
TH1 = F4H TH1 = E8H

TH1 register values to obtain different Baud rates

Initial Value
Baud Rate
TH1 in Hexadecimal TH1 in decimal
FD –3 9600
FA –6 4800
F4 –12 2400
E8 –24 1200

Note: In 8051, serial communication uses a standard crystal frequency i.e.
11.0592 MHz.
8051 Timers and Serial Port 177

SCON register configuration:

For serial port communication SCON is loaded with 50H as shown in figure.

SM0 SM1 SM2 REN TB8 RB8 TI RI

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

Serial Enable Clear flag

mode 1 reception

Multiprocessor 8-bit data (transmit

communication and receive)

Fig. 4.6.5: SCON register configuration

TMOD register configuration:

For serial port communication TMOD register is loaded with 20H i.e. Timer1,
Mode2.

Example 4.15:
 rite a program for the 8051 to transfer letter “A” serially at 9600 baud,
W
continuously.
Solution:
ORH 00H
MOV TMOD,#20H ;timer 1,mode 2(auto reload)
MOV TH1,#-3 ;9600 baud rate
MOV SCON,#50H ;8-bit, 1 stop, REN enabled
SETB TR1 ;start timer 1
AGAIN: MOV SBUF,#”A” ;letter “A” to transfer
HERE: JNB TI, HERE ;wait for the last bit
CLR TI ;clear TI for next char
SJMP AGAIN ;keep sending A
END
C-Program
#include <reg51.h>
void main(void)
{
TMOD=0x20; //use Timer 1, mode 2
178 8051 Microcontroller

TH1=0xFD; //9600 baud rate

SCON=0x50;
TR1=1;
while (1)
{
SBUF=‘A’; //place value in buffer
while (TI==0);
TI=0;
}
}
Example 4.16:
Write an ALP and C program to serially transmit the message “ECE”
continuously at a baud rate of 9600, 8-bit data and 1 stop bit.
Solution:
ALP C Program
ORG 00H #include <reg51.h>
MOV TMOD, #20H void send(unsigned char);
MOV TH1, #-3 void main()
MOV SCON, #50H {
SETB TR1 TMOD=0x20;
AGAIN MOV A, # “E” TH1=0xFD;
ACALL SEND SCON=0x50;
MOV A, # “C” TR1=1;
ACALL SEND while (1)
MOV A, # “E”        {
ACALL SEND send(‘E’);
SJMP AGAIN send(‘C’);
SEND: MOV SBUF, A send(‘E’);
WAIT: JNB TI, WAIT        }
}
CLR TI
void send(unsigned char msg);
RET
{
END
SBUF=msg;
while(TI==0);
TI=0;
}
8051 Timers and Serial Port 179

Alternate ALP and C Program

ALP C Program
ORG 00H #include <reg51.h>
MOV TMOD, #20H void main()
MOV TH1, #-3 {
MOV SCON, #50H    unsigned char i;
SETB TR1 unsigned char msg[ ] = “ECE”;
MOV DPTR, #MESSAGE TMOD=0x20;
AGAIN: CLR A TH1=0xFD;
MOVC A, @A+DPTR SCON=0x50;
JZ GO TR1=1;
MOV SBUF, A while (1)
{
WAIT: JNB TI, WAIT for(i=0; i<5; i++)
CLR TI {
INC DPTR SBUF=msg[i];
GO: SJMP GO while (TI==0);
MESSAGE: DB “ECE”,0 TI=0;
END }
}
}

Example 4.17:
Write an ALP and C program to serially transmit the message “HELLO”
continuously at a baud rate of 9600, 8-bit data and 1 stop bit.
Solution:

ALP C Program
ORG 00H #include <reg51.h>
MOV TMOD, #20H void send(unsigned char);
MOV TH1, #-3 void main()
MOV SCON, #50H {
SETB TR1 TMOD=0x20;
AGAIN MOV A, # “H”
ACALL SEND
......Continued
180 8051 Microcontroller

MOV A,#“E” TH1=0xFD;

ACALL SEND SCON=0x50;
MOV A,#“L” TR1=1;
ACALL SEND while (1)
MOV A, #“L” {
ACALL SEND send(‘H’);
MOV A, #“0” send(‘E);
ACALL SEND send(‘L’);
SJMP AGAIN send(‘L’);
send(‘0’);
SEND: MOV SBUF, A }
WAIT: JNB TI, WAIT }
CLR TI void send(unsigned char msg);
RET {
SBUF=msg;
END while(TI==0);
TI=0;
}

Example 4.18:
Write an ALP and C program to serially transmit the message “GMIT
DAVANGERE” continuously at a baud rate of 9600, 8-bit data and 1 stop
bit.
Solution:

ALP C Program
ORG 00H #include <reg51.h>
MOV TMOD, #20H void main( )
MOV TH1,#-3 {
MOV SCON,#50H unsigned char i;
SETB TR1 unsigned char msg[ ] =
repeat: MOV DPTR,#msg “GMIT DAVANGERE”;
up: CLR A TMOD=0x20;
MOVC A,@A+DPTR TH1=0xFD;
JZ repeat SCON=0x50;
ACALL send TR1=1;
INC DPTR while (1)
......Continued
8051 Timers and Serial Port 181

SJMP up {
send: MOV SBUF,A for(i=0; i<14; i++)
{
here: JNB TI, here SBUF=msg[i];
CLR TI while (TI==0);
RET TI=0;
msg: db “GMIT DAVANGERE”,0 }
END }
}

Example 4.19
 rite a program to transfer a letter 'Y' serially at 9600 baud continuously
W
and also to send a letter 'N' through port0, which is connected to a
display divide
Solution
ORG 00h
MOV TMOD,#020H ; timer 1. mode 2
MOV TH1,#-3 ; 9600 baud rate
MOV SCON,#50H ; 8 bits, 1stop, REN enabled
SETB TRI ; START TIMER 1
AGAIN:
MOV SBUF, #"Y" ; transfer *Y* serially
HERE: JNB TI, HERE ; WAIT FOR transmission to be over
CLR TI ; clear Tl for next transmission
MOV P0, #"N" ; move "N" to P0 for parallel transfer
SJMP AGAIN ; repeat
END

P3.1

8051
Display
P0

Fig. 4.6.6: 8051 PORT P0 interfaced with display

182 8051 Microcontroller

Example 4.20:
Write an ALP and C program to receive serial data at 4800 baud rate and
send it to port 0.
Solution

ALP
ORG 00H
MOV TMOD, #20H ;Timer1, Mode2
MOV TH1, #-6 ;4800 baud rate
MOV SCON, #50H ;serial mode 1
SETB TR1 ;start timer 1
AGAIN: CLR RI ;clear RI flag
WAIT: JNB RI, WAIT ;wait till character is received
MOV A, SBUF   ;received character is moved into Accumulator
MOV P0, A ;copy Accumulator content into P0
SJMP AGAIN ;repeat for next character
END

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void main()
{
unsigned char rdata;
TMOD=0x20; //use Timer 1, mode 2
TH1=0xFA; //4800 baud rate
SCON=0x50; //serial mode 1
TR1=1; //start timer 1
while (1)
{
while (RI==0); //wait to receive data
rdata=SBUF; //read received data
P0=rdata; //send received data to P0
RI=0; //clear RI flag
} //end of while
} //end of main
8051 Timers and Serial Port 183

Example 4.21:
 rite a Cprogram for the 8051 to transfer the letter "C" serially at 9600
W
baud continuously. Use S bit data and 1 stop bit.
Solution
#include<reg51.h> ORG 00H
void mainO MOV TMOD,#20h
{ MOV THl,#-3
TMOD=0x20; MOV SCON,#50h
THl=0xFD; SETB TR1
SCON=0X50; up:
TR1=1; MOV SBUF,#'C'
while(l) here: JNB TI here
{ CLR TI
SBUF='C'; SJMP up
while(TI=0); END
TI=0;
}
}

Example 4.22:

 nd an 8051 C program to transfer the message "GOOD MORNING" serially

fi
at 9600 baud, 8-bit data, 1 stop bit.
Solution

ORG 00H #include<reg51.h>

MOV TMOD,#20H void main()
MOV THl,#-3 {
MOV SCON, #50H unsigned char i;
SETB TR1 unsigned char msg[]="GOOD
repeat: MORNING";
MOV DPTR, msg TMOD=Ox20;
up: CLR A THl=0xFD:
MOVC A,@A+DPTR SCON=0X50;
JZ repeat TR1=1:
ACALL send while(l)
......Continued
184 8051 Microcontroller

INC DPTR {
SJMP up for(i=0; i< 12; i++)
send: {
MOV SBUF, A SBUF=msg[i];
here: JNB TI, here while (TI==0);
CLR TI TI=0:
RET }
msg: db "GOOD MORNING",0 }
END }

Example 4.23:
Write an 8051 C program to receive byte of data serially and put them
on P1. Set the baud rate to 4800, 8-bit data, 1 stop bit.
Solution

#include<reg51.h> ORG 00h

void main() MOV TMOD,#20h
{ MOV TH1,#-6
TMOD=0x20; MOV SCON,#50h
TH1=-6; SETB TR1
SCON=0X50; up: CLR RI
TR1=1; here: JNB RI, here
while(1) MOV A, SBUF
{ MOV P1,A
RI=0; SJMP up
while(RI==0); END
P1=SBUF;
}
}
OR
#include<reg51.h> ORG 00h
void main() MOV TMOD,#20h
{ MOV TH1,#-6
TMOD=0x20; MOV SCON,#50h
TH1=-6; SETB TR1
......Continued
8051 Timers and Serial Port 185

SCON=0X50; up:
TR1=1; here: JNB RI, here
while(1) MOV A, SBUF
{ MOV P1,A
while(RI==0); CLR RI
P1=SBUF; SJMP up
RI=0; END
}
}
NOTE: Both programs are correct.

Example 4.24:
Write an 8051 ALP and C program to transfer serially the character “H”
continuously at a baud rate of 9600.
Solution

#include<reg51.h> ORG 00h

void main() MOV TMOD,#20h
MOV TH1,#-3
{
MOV SCON,#50h
TMOD=0x20;
SETB TR1
TH1=0xFD; up:
SCON=0X50; MOV SBUF,#'H'
TR1=1; here: JNB TI, here
while(1) CLR TI
SJMP up
{
END
SBUF='H';
while(TI==0);
TI=0;
}
}

Example 4.25:
Write an 8051 ALP and C program to transfer serially the character
“H” continuously at a baud rate of 19200 with a crystal frequency of
11.0592 MHz.
186 8051 Microcontroller

Solution

#include<reg51.h> ORG 00h

void main() MOV A,PCON
{ SETB ACC.7
TMOD=0x20; MOV PCON,A
TH1=0xFD;
MOV TMOD,#20h
SCON=0X50;
MOV TH1,#-3
TR1=1;
MOV SCON,#50h
PCON = PCON | 0X80;
while(1) SETB TR1
{ up:
SBUF='H'; MOV SBUF,#'H'
while(TI==0); here: JNB TI, here
TI=0; CLR TI
} SJMP up
} END

Example 4.26:
Write an 8051 ALP and C program to transfer serially the character “H”
to serial #1 continuously at a baud rate of 9600.
Solution

#include<reg51.h> SBUF1 EQU 0C1h

sfr SBUF1=0XC1; SCON1 EQU 0C0h
sfr SCON1=0XC0; TI1 BIT 0C1h
sbit TI1=0XC1;
void main()
ORG 00h
{
MOV TMOD,#20h
TMOD=0x20;
MOV TH1,#-3
TH1=0xFD;
SCON1=0X50; MOV SCON1,#50h
TR1=1; SETB TR1
while(1) up:
{ MOV SBUF1,#'H'
SBUF1='H'; here: JNB TI1, here
while(TI1==0); CLR TI
TI1=0; SJMP up
}
END
}
8051 Timers and Serial Port 187

Example 4.27:
Write an 8051 ALP and C program to receive data serially and it in RAM
memory location 60h. Set a baud rate of 9600.
Solution

#include<reg51.h> ORG 00h

void main() MOV TMOD,#20h
{ MOV TH1,#-3
unsigned char value; MOV SCON,#50h
TMOD=0x20; SETB TR1
TH1=-3; up: CLR RI
SCON=0X50; here: JNB RI, here
TR1=1; MOV A, SBUF
while(1) MOV 60h,A
{ SJMP up
RI=0; END
while(RI==0);
value = SBUF;
}
}

Example 4.28:
Write an 8051 ALP and C program to receive data serially and it in RAM
memory location 60h. Set a baud rate of 9600. Use serial #1.
Solution

#include<reg51.h> SBUF1 EQU 0C1h

sfr SBUF1=0XC1; SCON1 EQU 0C0h
sfr SCON1=0XC0; TI1 BIT 0C1h
sbit TI1=0XC1; ORG 00h
void main() MOV TMOD,#20h
{ MOV TH1,#-3
unsigned char value; MOV SCON1,#50h
TMOD=0x20; SETB TR1
TH1=-3; up: CLR RI1
here: JNB RI1, here
SCON1=0X50;
......Continued
188 8051 Microcontroller

TR1=1; MOV A, SBUF1

while(1) MOV 60h,A
SJMP up
{
END
RI1=0;
while(RI1==0);
value = SBUF1;
}
}

Example 4.29:
Write an 8051 ALP and C program to transfer serially the character “H”
continuously at a baud rate of 19200 with a crystal frequency of 11.0592
MHz.
Solution

#include<reg51.h> ORG 00h

void main() MOV A,PCON
{ SETB ACC.7
TMOD=0x20; MOV PCON,A
TH1=0xFD; MOV TMOD,#20h
SCON=0X50; MOV TH1,#-3
TR1=1; MOV SCON,#50h
PCON = PCON | 0X80; SETB TR1
while(1) up:
{ MOV SBUF,#'H'
SBUF='H'; here: JNB TI, here
while(TI==0); CLR TI
TI=0; SJMP up
} END
}

Example 4.30:
Write an 8051 C program to send two different strings to the serial port.
Assuming that SW is connected to pin P2.0, monitor its status and make
a decision as follows:
SW=0: send your first name
8051 Timers and Serial Port 189

SW=1: send your last name

Assume XTAL=11.0592 MHz, baud rate of 9600,8-bit data, 1 stop bit.
Solution

#include<reg51.h>
sbit SW=P2^0; //input switch
void main(void)
{
unsigned char i;
unsigned char fname [] =”ALI”;
unsigned char lname [] ="AKBAR";
TMOD=0x20;
TH1=0xFD;
SCON=0x50;
TR1=1;
if (SW==0) //check switch
{
for (i=0;i<3;i++)
{
SBUF=fname[i];
while (TI==0);
TI=0;
}
}
else
{
for (i=0 ; i<5 ; i++) //write name
{
SBUF=lname[i]; //place value in buffer
while (TI==0); //wait for transmit
TI=0;
}
}
}

Example 4.31:
Write an 8051 C program to send two messages “Normal Speed” and
“High Speed” to the serial port. Assuming that SW is connected to pin
P2.0, monitor its status and set the baud rate as follows:
190 8051 Microcontroller

SW=0; 9600 baud rate

SW=1; 19200 baud rate
Assume that XTAL=11.0592MHz for both cases.
Solution

#include<reg 51.h>
sbit SW=P2^0; //input switch
void main(void)
{
unsigned char i;
unsigned char mess1 [] =”Normal Speed”;
unsigned char mess2 [] =”High Speed”;
TMOD=0X20; //use timer1, 8bit auto-reload
TH1=0XFD; //9600 for normal speed
SCON=0X50;
TR1=1; //star timer
if (SW= =0)
{
for (i=0;i<12;i++)
{
SBUF=mess1[i];
while (TI= =0);
TI=0;
}
}
else
{
PCON=PCON|0X80; //for high speed of 19200
for (i=0;i<10;i++)
{
SBUF=mess2[i];
while (TI= =0);
TI=0;
}
}
}
 5
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing
Applications
5.1 Introduction to Interrupts
An interrupt is the occurrence of a condition (an event) that causes a temporary
suspension of a program while the event is serviced by another program (Interrupt
Service Routine ‘ISR’).
OR
An interrupt is an external or internal event that interrupts the microcontroller
to inform it that a device needs its service.

5.1.1 Interrupt &Polling methods

A single microcontroller can serve several devices. There are two ways to do that
1. Interrupts
2. Polling.
Interrupts
Whenever any device needs its service, the device notifies the microcontroller by
sending it an interrupt signal. Upon receiving an interrupt signal, the microcontroller
interrupts whatever it is doing and serves the device. The program which is associated
with the interrupt is called the interrupt service routine(ISR) or interrupt handler.
Polling
Microcontroller continuously monitors the status of a given device. When the conditions
met, it performs the service. After that, it moves on to monitor the next device until
each one is serviced.

5.1.2 Comparison between interrupt and polling method

191
192 8051 Microcontroller

Sl.
INTERRUPTS POLLING
No.
1 Whenever any device needs its service, Microcontroller can monitor the
the device notifies the microcontroller status of several devices and serve
by sending it an interrupt signal. each of them as certain conditions
Upon receiving an interrupt signal, the are met.After that, it moves on to
microcontroller interrupts whatever it is monitor the next device until each
doing and serves the device. one is serviced.
2 Each device can get the attention of the The polling method cannot assign
microcontroller based on the priority priority since it checks all devices
assigned to it. in a round-robin fashion.
3 Microcontroller can also ignore (MASK) Microcontroller cannot ignore (MASK)
a device request for service. a device request for service.
4 Microcontroller time is used efficiently. Microcontroller time is not efficiently
used.

5.1.3 Steps in executing an interrupt

Upon activation of an interrupt, the microcontroller goes through the following steps.
1. It finishes the instruction it is executing and saves the address of the next
instruction (PC) on the stack.
2. It also saves the current status of all the interrupts internally (i.e: not on the
stack).
3. It jumps to a fixed location in memory, called the interrupt vector table that
holds the address of the ISR.
4. The microcontroller gets the address of the ISR from the interrupt vector table and
jumps to it. It starts to execute the interrupt service subroutine until it reaches the
last instruction of the subroutine which is RETI (return from interrupt).
5. Upon executing the RETI instruction, the microcontroller returns to the place
where it was interrupted. First, it gets the program counter (PC) address from
the stack by popping the top two bytes of the stack into the PC. Then it starts
to execute from that address.

5.1.4 Different types of interrupt

The 8051 has six sources of interrupts and only five interrupts are available to the
user. The RESET interrupt is not available to the user.
RESET: When the RESET pin is activated, the 8051 jumps to address location 0000H.,
i.e., program counter is loaded with 000H (PC = 00H)

Timer Interrupts: There are two timer interrupts

8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 193

1. TF0 for Timer 0 and its interrupt vector address is 000BH.

2. TF1 for Timer 1 and its interrupt vector address is 001BH

External Hardware Interrupts

There are two external hardware interrupts and also referred to as EX1 and EX2.
1. INT0 (P3.2) and its interrupt vector address is 0003H.
2. INT1 (P3.3) and its interrupt vector address is 0013H

Serial communication interrupt

It has a single interrupt that belongs to both receive and transmit and its interrupt
vector address is 0023H.

Table 5.1.1: Interrupt Vector Table

Interrupt ROM Location (Hex) Pin

Reset 0000 9
––––
External hardware interrupt 0 (INT 0) 0003 P3.2 (12)
Timer 0 interrupt (TF0) 000B
––––
External hardware interrupt 1 (INT 1) 0013 P3.3 (13)
Timer 1 interrupt (TF1) 001B
Serial COM interrupt (RI and TI) 0023

5.1.5 IE and IP registers

Interrupt enabling disabling and priority setting
• Upon reset, all interrupts are disabled (masked), meaning that none will be
responded to by the microcontroller if they are activated. The interrupts must be
enabled by software in order for the microcontroller to respond to them.
• There is a register called IE (interrupt enable) that is responsible for enabling
(unmasking) and disabling (masking) the interrupts.

5.1.6 Interrupt Enable (IE) registers

D7 D0
EA – ET2 ES ET1 EX1 ET0 EX0

Fig. 5.1.1 : Interrupt Enable register

194 8051 Microcontroller

EA IE.7 Disables all interrupts. If EA = 0, no interrupt is acknowledged. If EA =

1, each interrupt source is individually enabled or disabled by setting
or clearing its enable bit.
- IE.6 Not implemented, reserved for future use.*
ET2 IE.5 Enables or disables Timer 2 overflow or capture interrupt (8052 only).
ES IE.4 Enables or disables the serial port interrupt.
ET1 IE.3 Enables or disables Timer 1 overflow interrupt.
ET1 IE.2 Enables or disables external interrupt 1.
ET0 IE.l Enables or disables Timer 0 overflow interrupt.
EX0 IE.0 Enables or disables external interrupt 0.

Note: U
 ser software should not write is to reserved bits. These bits may be used in
future flash microcontrollers to invoke new features.
To enable an interrupt, we take the following steps:
1. Bit D7 of the IE register (EA) must be set to high to allow the rest of register to
take effect
2. The value of EA
• If EA = 1, interrupts are enabled and will be responded to if their corresponding
bits in IE are high.
• If EA = 0, no interrupt will be responded to, even if the associated bit in the
IE register is high.
5.1.7 Interrupt Priority
When the 8051 is powered up, the priorities are assigned according to Table 4.7.2.
In reality, the priority scheme is nothing but an internal polling sequence in which the
8051 polls the interrupts in the sequence listed and responds accordingly
Table 5.1.2: 8051 Interrupt Priority upon Reset
Highest to Lowest Priority
––––
External Interrupt 0 (INT 0)
Timer Interrupt 0 (TF0)
––––
External Interrupt 1 (INT 1)
Timer Interrupt 1 (TF1)
Serial Communication (RI + TI)

For example, that if external hardware interrupts 0 and 1 are activated at the same
––––
time, external interrupt 0 is responded to first. Only after INT 0 has been serviced,
–––– ––––
INT 1 serviced, since INT 1 has the lowest priority.
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 195

5.1.8 Priority Setting

Interrupt priority is done by programming a register called Interrupt Priority (IP)
Register. Upon power-up reset, the IP register contains all 0s, making the priority
sequence based. To give a higher priority to any of the interrupts, we make the
corresponding bit in the IP register high.
5.1.9 Interrupt Priority (IP) Register

D7 D0
– – PT2 PS PT1 PX1 PT0 PX0
Fig. 5.1.2: Interrupt Priority Register

Priority bit = 1 assigns high priority. Priority bit = 0 assigns low priority.
— IP.7 Reserved
— IP.6 Reserved
PT2 IP.5 Timer 2 interrupt priority bit (8052 only)
PS IP.4 Serial port interrupt priority bit
PT1 IP.3 Timer 1 interrupt priority bit
PX1 . IP.2 External interrupt 1 priority bit
PT0 IP.l Timer 0 interrupt priority bit
PX0 IP.0 External interrupt 0 priority bit

Note: User software should never write 1s to unimplemented bits, since they may be
used in future microcontrollers to invoke new features.
Each interrupt source can be programmed to have one of the two priority levels
by setting (high priority) or clearing (low priority) a bit in the IP (Interrupt Priority)
Register. A low priority interrupt can itself be interrupted by a high priority interrupt,
but not by another low priority interrupt. If two interrupts of different priority levels are
received simultaneously, the request of higher priority level is served. If the requests
of the same priority level are received simultaneously, an internal polling sequence
determines which request is to be serviced.

Example 5.1:
Discuss what happens if interrupts INT0, TF0, and INT1 are activated at
the same time. Assume priority levels were set by the power-up reset and
the external hardware interrupts are edge-triggered.
196 8051 Microcontroller

Solution:
If these three interrupts are activated at the same time, they are latched and kept
internally. Then the 8051 checks all five interrupts according to the sequence listed in
Table 4.7.2. If any is activated, it services it in sequence. Therefore, when the above
three interrupts are activated, IE0 (external interrupt 0) is serviced first, then timer 0
(TF0), and finally IE1 (external interrupt 1).

Example 5.2:
––––
(a) P rogram the IP register to assign the highest priority to INT 1 (external
interrupt 1),
–––– ––––
(b) Discuss what happens if INT 0 INT 1 , and TF0 are activated at the
same time. Assume the interrupts are both edge-triggered.

Solution:
––––
(a) MOV IP,#00000100B ;IP.2=1 assign INT 1 higher priority. The instruction SETB
IP.2 also will do the same thing as the above line since IP is bit-addressable.
––––
(b) The instruction in Step (a) assigned a higher priority to I INT 1 than the others;
–––– ––––
therefore, when INT 0, INT 1, and TF0 interrupts are activated at the same time,
–––– ––––
the 8051 services INT 1 first, then it services INT 0, then TF0. This is due to the
–––––
fact that INT1 has a higher priority than the other two because of the instruction
––––
in Step (a). The instruction in Step (a) makes both the INT 0 and TF0 bits in the IP
––––
register 0. As a result, the sequence in Table 4.7.2 gives a higher priority to IINT 0
over TF0.

Example 5.3:
Assume that after reset, the interrupt priority is set the instruction MOV
IP,#00001100B. Discuss the sequence in which the interrupts are serviced.

Solution:
The instruction “MOV IP #00001100B” (B is for binary) and timer 1 (TF1)to a higher
priority level compared with the reset of the interrupts. However, since they are polled
according to Table 5.1.2, they will have the following priority.
––––
Highest Priority External Interrupt 1 (I NT1)
Timer Interrupt 1 (TF1)
––––
External Interrupt 0 (I NT0)
Timer Interrupt 0 (TF0)
Lowest Priority Serial Communication (RI+TI)
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 197

Example 5.4:
Show the instructions to
(a) Enable the serial interrupt, timer 0 interrupt, and external hardware
interrupt 1 (EX1),and
(b) Disable (mask) the timer 0 interrupt, then
(c) Show how to disable all the interrupts with a single instruction.

Solution:
(a)
MOV IE,#10010110B ;enable serial, timer 0, EX1
Another way to perform the same manipulation is
SETB IE.7 ;EA=1, global enable
SETB IE.4 ;enable serial interrupt
SETB IE.1 ;enable Timer 0 interrupt
SETB IE.2 ;enable EX1
(b)
CLR IE.1 ;mask (disable) timer 0 interrupt only
(c)
CLR IE.7 ;disable all interrupts

Example 5.5:
Discuss the interrupt priority order achieved by the execution of
MOV IP,#11H instruction 5-Marks
Ans. IP = 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 i.e. PS=1 & PX0=1
• After executing MOV IP,#11H instruction, two interrupts i.e. Serial port interrupt
and External interrupt 0 are assigned with priority levels
• The external interrupt 0 has highest priority. So it will be served first.
• The serial port interrupt has lowest priority and hence served after external
interrupt 0.

5.1.9 8051 Interrupt Numbers

8051 compiler have extensive support for the interrupts.
• They assign a unique number to each of the 8051 interrupts.
• It can also assign a register bank to an ISR. This avoids code overhead due to
the pushes and pops of the R0-R7 registers.
198 8051 Microcontroller

Table 5.1.3: 8051 Interrupt Numbers

Interrupt Name Numbers used by 8051

C
––––
External Interrupt 0 (INT 0) 0
Timer Interrupt 0 (TF0) 1
––––
External Interrupt 1 (INT 1) 2
Timer Interrupt 1 (TF1) 3
Serial Communication (RI + TI) 4
Advantages
1. Multitasking
2. Efficient, better than polling.
3. Great flexibility.
4. All peripheral devices have to be handled by tasks
5. Data transfer by polling.
6. Hardware details encapsulated in dedicated routines.
7. Can enable interrupts before the servicing of an individual interrupt is complete
reducing interrupt latency.
8. Handles interrupt with different priorities.
9. Uses a single jump and saves valuable cycles to go to the ISR.

Disadvantages
1. Sometimes requires additional hardware.
2. Degradation of processor performance (busy wait)
3. Kernel has to be modified when adding devices.
4. More inter-processor communication.
5. Task must know low level details of the drive.
6. Lower priority interrupts can block higher priority interrupts.
7. Trends to be more complex.
8. Each ISR has a mechanism to set the external interrupt mask to stop lower-
priorities interrupts from halting the current ISR, which add extra code to
each ISR.
Differentiate between RET and RETI
RET
• The RET instruction returns the program from a subroutine.
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 199

• RET pops the return address from the stack and continue execution
there and making the 8051 return to where it left. The high byte
and low byte address of PC from the stack and decrements the
SP by 2.
• The execution of the instruction will result in the program to resume from the
location just after the CALL instruction.
• No flags are affected.

Example:
• Suppose SP=0BH originally and an interrupt is detected during the instruction
ending at location 0213H
ff RAM Internal locations 0AH and 0BH contain the values 14H and 02H
respectively.
ff The RET instruction leaves SP = 09H and returns program execution to
location 0214H.

RETI
• The RETI instruction returns the program from an interrupt subroutine.
• RETI pops the high byte and low byte address of a PC from
the stack and restores the interrupt logic to accept additional
interrupts.
• SP decrements by 2 and no other registers are affected. However the PSW is not
automatically restored to its pre-interrupt status.
• After the RETI, program execution will resume immediately after the point at
which the interrupt is detected.
• No flags are affected.

Example:
• Suppose SP=0BH originally and an interrupt is detected during the instruction
ending at location 0213H
ff RAM Internal locations 0AH and 0BH contain the values 14H and 02H
respectively.
ff The RETI instruction leaves SP=09H and returns program execution to
location 0214H.

™™ Explain why we cannot use RET instead of RETI as the last instruction of
an ISR.
Solution:
• RET and RETI perform the same actions of popping off the top two bytes of the
200 8051 Microcontroller

stack into the program counter, and making the 8051 return to where it left.
• However, RETI also performs an additional task of clearing the interrupt-in-
service flag, indicating that the servicing of the interrupt is over and the 8051
now can accept a new interrupt on that pin.
• If we use RET instead of RETI as the last instruction of the interrupt service routine,
then it will simply block any new interrupt on that pin after the first interrupt, since
the pin status would indicate that the interrupt is still being serviced.
• In the case of TF0, TF1, TCON.1 and TCON.3, they are cleared due to the
execution of RETI.
5.1.10 Enabling or disabling of Interrupts.
1. Using bit instructions
Method 1 Method 2 Comments
SETB EA SETB IE. 7 ; EA=1 ;enable interrupts
SETB ET0 SETB IE. 1 ; ET0 = 1;enable timer 0 interrupt
SETB ET1 SETB IE. 3 ; ET1 = 1;enable timer 1 interrupt
SETB EX0 SETB IE. 0 ; EX0= 1;enable external 0 interrupt
CLR ES CLR IE. 4 ; ES=0 ;disable serial interrupt
CLR EX1 CLR IE. 2 ; EX1=0 ;disable external 1 interrupt
2. Using byte instruction
MOV IE, #10001011B 'OR' MOV IE, #8DH
Note: Bypassing interrupt vector table
ORG 0000H ;wake-up ROM reset locationi
LJMP TO ;bypass interrupt vectortable
; the wake-up program
ORG 30H
TO:
....
END

Example 5.4:
Write a C program using interrupts to do the following:
(a) Generate a 10000 Hz frequency on P2.1 using TO 8-bit auto-reload,
(b) Use timer 1 as an event counter to count up a 1-Hz pulse and display
it on P0. The pulse is connected to EX1. Assume that XTAL = 11.0592
MHz. Set the baud rate at 9600.

Solution:
include <reg51.h>
abit WAVE = P2^1;
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 201

unsigned char cnt;

void timer0() interrupt 1
{
WAVE=~WAVE; //toggle pin
}
void timer1() interrupt 3
{
cnt++; //increment counter
P0=cnt; //display value on pins
void main()
{
cnt=0; //set counter to zero TMOD - 0x4 2;
TMOD=0x-46; //10000 Hz
IE=0x86; //enable interrupts
TR0=1; //start timer 0
TR1=1; //start timer 1
while(1); //wait until interrupted
1/10000 Hz = 100 μs
100 μs/2 = 50 μs
50 μs/1.085 ms = 46

P0 LEDs

8051

P2.1
10000 Hz
Fig.5.1.3: Generating square wave on P2.1

Example 5.:7
Show the instructions to
(a) Enable the serial interrupt, timer 0 interrupt, and external hardware
interrupt 1 (EX1),and
202 8051 Microcontroller

(b) Disable (mask) the timer 0 interrupt, then

(c) Show how to disable all the interrupts with a single instruction.
Solution:
(a) MOV IE,#10010110B ;enable serial, ;timer 0, EX1
Another way to perform the same manipulation is
SETB IE.7 ;EA=1, global enable
SETB IE.4 ;enable serial interrupt
SETB IE.1 ;enable Timer 0 interrupt
SETB IE.2 ;enable EX1
(b) CLR IE.1 ;mask (disable) timer 0 interrupt only
(c) CLR IE.7 ;disable all interrupts
Note: In C Program, to code ISR, we use standard syntax as shown below.
(For timer 0, interrupt number is ‘1’).
Keyword to use interrupt
void time0 (void) interrupt 1
{ Interrupt Number
ISR of timer 0
}

Example 5.8:
Write a program that displays a value of *Y at port l and 'N' at port 3
and also generates a square wave of 10 kHz with Timer 0 in mode 2 at
port pin P0.1. XTAL=22 MHz.

Solution:
;––– upon wake up, go to main,avoid using memory space allocated to
interrupt vectoi table
ORG 0000H
LJMP MAIN ;bypass interrupt vector table
;---ISR for Timer 0 to generate square wave
ORG 000BH ;Timer 0 interrupt vector
CPL P0.1
RETI
;---the main program for initialization
ORG 003OH ;a location after the interrupt vectors
MAIN: MOV TMOD,#02H ;Timer 0, mode 2 (auto-reload)
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 203

MOV THO, #0B6H ;move count value into THO

MOV IE,#82H ;enable interrupt timer 0
SETB TR0 ;start Timer 0
BACK: MOV P1,#'Y' ;display'Y'at port PJ
MOV P3,#'N' ;display'N'at port P3
SJMP BACK ;keep doing this until interrupted
END

Example 5.9:
 rite a program to generate two square waves one of 5 KHz frequency
W
at pin P1.1 and another of frequency 25 kHz at pin P2.1 Assume
XTAL = 22 MHz.

8051
P1.1 5 kHz

P2.1 25 kHz

Solution:
;Tested for an AT89C51 with a crystal frequency of 22 MHz.
ORG 0000H ;avoid using the interrupt vector table
LJMP MAIN
;--ISR for Timer 0
ORG 000B ;Interrupt vector for Timer 0
CPL Pl.l
RETI
;---ISR for Timer 1
ORG 001BH ;Interrupt vector for Timer 1
CPL P2.1
RETI
;---main program for initialization
ORG 0030H
MAIN: MOV TMOD,#22H ;both timers are initialized for Mode 2
MOV IE,#8AH ;enable the Timer 0 and Timer 1 Interrupts
MOV THO,#048H ;count value for 5 KHz square wave
MOV TH1,#0B6H ;count value for 25 KHz square wave
SETB TR0 ;start Timer 0
204 8051 Microcontroller

SETB TR1 ;start Timer 1

WAIT: SJMP WAIT ;
keep waiting for the roll off of either
timer
END

Example 5.10:
Two switches are connected to pins P3.2 and P 3.3. When a switch is
pressed, the corresponding line goes low. Write a program to
(a) light all LEDs connected to port 1, if the first switch is pressed.
(b) light all LEDs connected to port 2, if the second switch is pressed.

Solution:

;Tested for an AT89C5 with a crystal frequency of 22 MHz.

Pin 3.2 is the pin for Interrupt 0, and pin 3.3 is the pin for Interrupt 1.
;upon wake up,go to main
ORG 0000H ;bypass interrupt vector table
LJMP MAIN
;------------------the ISR for interrupt INTO
ORG 0003H ;interrupt vector for Interrupt 0 '
LED1: MOV P1,#0FFH ;turn on LEDs of portl
MOV R0,#255
DJNZ R0,LED1 ;keep the LEDs ON for a short time RETI
;------------------ISR for INT 1
ORG 0013H ;Interrupt vector for Interrupt 1
LED2 MOV P2, #0FFH ;tum on LEDs of port 2
MOV RO,#255
DJNZ R,LED2 ;keep the LEDs ON for a short time RETI
;------------------main program for initialization
ORG 0030H
MAIN: MOV IE,#85H ;enable INTO and INT1 HERE:
SJMP HERE
END
The LEDs will remain ON if the corresponding switch is kept pressed.

Example 5.11:
Generate from all pins of Portl, a square wave which is half the frequency
of the signal applied at INTO pin.
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 205

Solution:
;Tested for an AT89C51 with a crystal frequency of 22 MHz.
Every negative edge at Pin 3.2 will cause the INT0 (vectored to location 0003) interrupt
to be activated.
ORG 0000H
LJMP MAIN
;--ISR for hardware interrupt INT0
ORG 0003H
CPL PI
RETI
ORG 0030H
MAIN: SETB TCON.0 ;make INTO an edge-triggered interrupt
MOV IE,#81H ;enable hardware interrupt INT0
HERE: SJMP HERE
END

Example 5.12:
Write a C program that continuously gets a single bit of data from P1.1
and sends it to P1.2, while simultaneously creating a square wave of 200
ms period on pin P1.3. Use timer 0 to create the square wave. Assume that
XTAL = 11.0592 MHz.

Solution:
We will use timer 0 in mode 2 (auto-reload). One half of the period is 100 μs.
100/1.085 μs = 92, and TH0 = 256 - 92 = 164 or A4H
200 μs/2 = 100μs       8051
100 μs / 1.085 μs = 92

#include <reg5l.h> P1.1 LED

sbit SW = Pl^2;
sbit rec = Pl^1; Switch P1.2
sbit WAVE = Pl^3;
void timer0(void) interrupt 1
{ P1.3
5000 Hz
WAVE = ~WAVE; //toggle pin
}
void main()
{
206 8051 Microcontroller

SW = l; //make switch input

TMOD = 0x02;
THO = 0xA4 ; //THO = -92
IE = 0x82; //enable interrupts for timer 0
while(1)
{
rec = SW;//send switch to LED
}
}

Example 5.13:
Write a C program using interrupts to do the following:
(a) Generate a 10000 Hz frequency on P0.1 using TO 8-bit auto-reload,
(b) Use timer 1 as an event counter to count up a 1-Hz pulse and display
it on P1. The pulse is connected to EX1
Assume that XTAL = 11.0592 MHz. Set the baud rate at 9600.

Solution:
1 / 10000 Hz = 100 μs
100 μs / 2 = 50 μs
50 μs / 1.085 μis = 46
#include <reg51.h>
sbit WAVE = P0^1; 8051
unsigned char cnt;
P1 LEDs
void timer0() interrupt 1
{
WAVE = ~WAVE; //toggle pin
}
void timerl() interrupt 3 P0.1
10000 Hz
{
cnt++; //increment counter
PI = cnt; //display value on pins
}
void main()
{
cnt =0; //set counter to zero
TMOD = 0x42;
TH0 = 0x-46; //10000 Hz
IE = 0x86; //enable interrupts
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 207

TR0 = 1; //start timer 0

TR1 = 1; //start timer 1
while(1); //wait until interrupted
}
Example 5.14:
Write a C program that continuously gets a single bit of data from P1.7
and sends it to P1.0, while simultaneously creating a square wave of 200
μs period on pin P2.5. Use Timer 0 to create the square wave. Assume that
XTAL = 11.0592 MHz.

Solution:
We will use timer 0 mode 2 (auto-reload).

T = T1 + T2
100μs
100μs
T = 200µs T1 T2
T
T1 = T2 = = 100µs
2              T=200μs

Initial Count value:

Required delay × crystal freqyency
TH0 = Final value −
12
100µs × 11.0592 MHz
= 256 − = 256 − 92 = 164 = A4H
12
TH0 = A4H

#include <reg51.h>
sbit SW=P1^7;
sbit S_data=P1^0;
sbit S_WAVE=P2^5;
void timer0(void) interrupt 1
{
S_WAVE=~S_WAVE; //toggle pin
}
void main()
{
SW=1; //make switch input
TMOD=0x02;
208 8051 Microcontroller

TH0=0xA4; //TH0=-92
IE=0x82; //enable interrupt for timer 0
while (1)
{
S_data=SW; //send switch to LED
} 8051
}
P1.0 LED

SWITCH P1.7 5000 Hz

P2.5

Fig. 5.1.4: Generating square wave on P2.5

The frequency of the square wave generated is 5 KHz.

Example 5.15:
Write a C program using interrupts to do the following:
(a) Receive data serially and send it to P0
(b) Read port P1, transmit data serially, and give a copy to P2
(c) Make timer 0 generate a square wave of 5 kHz frequency
Assume that XTAL = 11.0592 MHz. Set the baud rate at 4800

Solution:
1 1 100μs
Time period T = = = 200µs 100μs
f 5KHz      T1 T2
T = T1 + T2

T = 200µs T=200μs

T
T1 = T2 = = 100µs
2
Initial Count value:
Required delay × crystal freqyency
TH0 = Final value −
12
100µs × 11.0592 MHz
= 256 − = 256 − 92 = 164 = A4H
12
TH0 = A4H

#include <reg51.h>
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 209

sbit WAVE=P0^1;
void timer0() interrupt 1
{
WAVE=~WAVE; //toggle pin
}
void serial0() interrupt 4
{
if (TI==1)
{
TI=0; //clear interrupt
}
else
{
P0=SBUF; //put value on pins
RI=0; //clear interrupt
}
}

void main()
{
unsigned char x;
P1=0xFF; //make P1 an input
TMOD=0x22;
TH1=0xF6; //4800 baud rate
SCON=0x50;
TH0=0xA4; //5 kHz has T=200us
IE=0x92; //enable interrupts
TR1=1; //start timer 1
TR0=1; //start timer 0
while (1)
{
x=P1; //read value from pins
SBUF=x; //put value in buffer
P2=x; //write value to pins
}
}
210 8051 Microcontroller

Example 5.16:
Write a C program using interrupts to do the following:
(a) Generate a 10 KHz frequency on P2.1 using T0 8-bit auto-reload
(b) Use timer 1 as an event counter to count up a 1-Hz pulse and display
it on P0. The pulse is connected to EX1.
Assume that XTAL = 11.0592 MHz. Set the baud rate at 9600.
Solution:
#include <reg51.h>
sbit WAVE =P2^1;
unsigned char cnt;
void timer0 ( ) interrupt 1
{
WAVE=~WAVE; //toggle pin
}
void timer1() interrupt 3
{
cnt++; //increment counter
P0=cnt; //display value on pins
}
void main()
{
cnt=0; //set counter to 0
TMOD=0x42;
TH0=0x-46; //10 KHz
IE=0x86; //enable interrupts
TR0=1; //start timer 0
while (1); //wait until interrupted
}

Example 5.17:
Write an ALP and C Program to generate a square wave of 5 KHz with
Timer0 Mode2 at port pin P2.1 using interrupt mode. Also display a value
of “A’ at PORT 0. Use XTAL = 22 MHz.

Solution:
We know that
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 211

T = T1 + T2

1 1
T= = = 2 × 10 −4 s
f 5KHz
T
T1 = T2 = = 1 × 10 −4 s
2

5 kHz
Timer 0
T1 T2 Mode 2 P2.1

8051
T

P0 A

Fig. 5.1.5: Generating square wave on P2.1

Initial Count value:
Required delay × crystal freqyency
TH0 = Final value −
12
1 × 10 −4 s × 22 × 106
= 256 −
12
= 256 − 183
= 73
TH0 = 49H

IE register configuration

EA – ET2 ES ET1 EX1 ET0 EX0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Enable Enable
interrupts timer 0
Fig. 5.1.6: IE register configuration

Load IE = 82H
The instruction used is MOV IE,#82H OR SETB EA and SETB ET0
212 8051 Microcontroller

ALP
ORG 00H
SJMP MAIN ;jump to main program
ORG 000BH ;ISR for Timer0
CPL P2.1 ;Toggle pin P2.1 for square wave
RETI ;return from interrupt
ORG 30H ;main program written from 30H
MAIN: MOV TMOD, #02H ;Timer0, Mode2
MOV TH0, #49h ;initial value to generate 5 KHz
MOV IE,#82H ;Enable ET0=1 & EA=1
SETB TR0 ;start timer 0
MOV P0,#’A’ ;Display ‘A’ at PORT P0
SJMP AGAIN
END
C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void timer0(void) interrupt 1 // ISR for interrupt number 1
{
P2.1=~P2.1; //Toggle pin P2.1 for square wave
}

void main( )
{
TMOD=0x02; //use Timer 0, mode 2
IE=0x82; //Enable ET0=1 & EA=1
TH0=0x49; //initial value to generate 5 KHz
TR0=1; //start timer 0
while (1)
{
P0=”A”; //send “A” to P0
} //end of while
} //end of main
Example 5.18:
 rite an ALP and C Program to generate two square waves of 25 KHz and
W
5 KHz at pins P0.1 and P0.2 respectively using timer 0 & timer 1 in Mode
2 in interrupt mode. Use XTAL = 22 MHz.
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 213

Solution:
25 kHz
Timer 0 P0.1 T2
T1
8051 5 kHz
Timer 1 P0.2 T

Fig. 5.1.7: Generating square wave on P0.1 & P0.2

For 5 KHz
We know that
1 1
T= = = 0.2 ms
f 5KHz
T = T1 + T2

T
T1 = T2 = = 0.1 ms
2
Initial Count value:
Required delay × crystal freqyency
TH1 = Final value −
12
1 × 10 −4 s × 22 × 106
= 256 − = 256 − 183 = 73
12
TH1 = 49H

For 25 KHz
We know that
T = T1 + T2

1 1 T
T= = = 4 × 10−5 s T1 = T2 = = 2 × 10−5 s
f 25KHz 2
Initial Count value:
Required delay × crystal freqyency
TH0 = Final value −
12
2 × 10−5 s × 22 × 106
= 256 − = 256 − 37 = 219d
12
TH0 = DBH
214 8051 Microcontroller

IE register configuration

EA – ET2 ES ET1 EX1 ET0 EX0

1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

Enable Enable Enable

interrupts timer 1 timer 0
interrupts interrupts

Fig. 5.1.8: IE register configuration

Load IE = 8AH
The instruction used is MOV IE,#8AH OR SETB EA, SETB ET1 and SETB ET0
ALP
ORG 00H
SJMP MAIN ;jump to main program
ORG 000BH ;ISR for Timer 0
CPL P0.1 ;Toggle pin P0.1 for square wave
RETI ;return from interrupt
ORG 001BH ;ISR for Timer 1
CPL P0.2 ;Toggle pin P0.2 for square wave
RETI ;return from interrupt
ORG 30H ;main program written from 30H
MAIN: MOV TMOD, #22H ;Timer0 & Timer1 in Mode2
MOV IE,#8AH ;Enable ET0=1, ET1=1 & EA=1
MOV TH0, #0DBH ;initial value to generate 25 KHz
MOV TH0, #49h ;initial value to generate 5 KHz
SETB TR0 ;start timer 0
SETB TR1 ;start timer 1
AGAIN: SJMP AGAIN
END
Note: T
 he instruction SJMP HERE executes continuously until an interrupt occurs,
it jumps to Timer 0 or Timer 1 ISR and services it and then return to the main
program i.e. SJMP HERE
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 215

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void timer0(void) interrupt 1 // ISR for interrupt number 1
{
P0.1=~P0.1; //Toggle pin P0.1 for square wave
}
void timer1(void) interrupt 3 // ISR for interrupt number 3
{
P0.2=~P0.2; //Toggle pin P0.2 for square wave
}
void main( )
{
TMOD=0x22; //use Timer 0, Timer 1 in mode 2
IE=0x8A; //Enable ET0=1, ET1=1 & EA=1
TH0=0xDB; //initial value to generate 25 KHz
TH1=0x49; //initial value to generate 5 KHz
TR0=1; //start timer 0
TR1=1; //start timer 1
while (1); //wait for indefinite time
} //end of main

5.2 ADC0804 (Analog to Digital Converter)

5.2.1 Introduction
VCC

Analog Binary
ADC
signal output
input

Fig. 5.2.1: Block diagram of ADC

216 8051 Microcontroller

• The ADC consists of an analog input, digital outputs, control lines and power
supply as shown in figure. 6.3.1.
• ADC converts an input analog signal to a digital output.
• ADCs are mainly classified into
i. Serial ADCs and
ii. Parallel ADCs
5.2.2 Pin diagram of ADC0804

CS 1 20 VCC(or VREF)
RD 2 19 CLK R
WR 3 18 DB0(LSB)
CLK IN 4 17 D1
INTR 5 16 D2
ADC0804
VIN(+) 6 15 D3
VIN(–) 7 14 D4
A GND 8 13 D5
VREF/2 9 12 D6
D GND 10 11 D7(MSB)

Fig. 5.2.2: Pin diagram of ADC0804

Table 5.2.1: Pin details of ADC0804

Pin No. Pin Name Pin Function
––––
1 C s Chip Select Chip select is an active low input used to activate the
ADC0804 chip.
––––
2 RD It is an input signal and active low. The ADC converts
the analog input to its binary equivalent and holds it
in an internal register.
––––
When C s = 0, if a high-to-low pulse is applied to
––––
the RD pin, the 8-bit digital output shows up at the
D0-D7.
––––
3 WR It is an active low input used to inform the ADC0804
–––– ––––
to start the conversion process. If C s = 0 when WR
makes a low to high transition, the ADC0804 starts
converting the analog input value of Vin to an 8-bit
digital number.
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 217

4& 19 CLK IN • CLK IN is an input pin connects to an external

& source when an external clock is used for
timing. The ADC0804 chip has an internal clock
CLK R
generator.
• The CLK IN & CLK R pins are connected to a resistor
and capacitor to use internal clock generator.
• The clock frequency is given by

1
f=
1.1 RC
              
––––––
5 INT R • This is an active low output pin.
––––––
• When INT R = 0, indicate end of conversion (EOC)
to 8051.
6 & 7 VIN(+)& VIN(-) • VIN(+) pin is connected with analog input to be
converted to digital
• VIN(-) pin is connected to ground
• These are the differential analog input given by
VIN = VIN(+) - VIN(-)

8 A GND Analog ground for analog signal

9 Vref/2 It is an input voltage used for the reference voltage.
If this pin is open, the analog input voltage for ADC
is in the range of 0V to 5V.
10 D GND Digital ground
18-11 D0-D7 D0-D7 are the 8-bit digital data output pins.
Vin
Dout =
Step Size
             
20 VCC VCC=5V. It is also used as a reference voltage when
Vref/2 input is open.

5.2.3 Timing diagram for data conversion by ADC0804 chip

The following steps must be followed for data conversion by the ADC0804 chip.
1. Make CS=0 and send a low-to-high pulse to pin WR to start the conversion.
218 8051 Microcontroller

2. Keep monitoring the INTR pin. If INTR is low, the conversion is finished and we
can go to the next step. If INTR is high, keep polling until it goes low.
3. After the INTR has become low, we make CS=0 and send a high-to-low pulse to
the RD pin to get the data out of the ADC0804 IC chip. The timing diagram for
this process is shown in figure. 5.2.3
Note: CS is set to low for both RD and WR pulses

CS is set to low for both

RD and WR pulses
CS

WR
D0-D7 Data out
INTR
Start conversion End conversion
RD

Read it
Fig. 5.2.3: Read and Write Timing for ADC0804

Example 5.19:
 rite the schematic, algorithm and a program to interface a ADC 0804
W
to 8051 +5V

8051 ADC0804
VCC 10K 150pF
P2.5 RD
P2.6 WR CLK R
CLK IN +5V
P1.0 D0
Vref/2 1.28V

Vin(+) 10K
Vin(–)
POT
P1.7 AGND
D7
CS
P2.7 INTR GND

Fig. 5.2.4: 8051 connection to ADC0804 with self-clocking

8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 219

 ALGORITHM
1. Set P1 as input port and P2.7 as input pin
2. Send a start of conversion to ADC. WR = low to high signal.
3. Wait for end of conversion by reading in the INTR pin (INTR = EOC = 0)
4. Enable RD =0, so that converted data is put on D0-D7 lines
5. Read in the digital data on D0-D7 using P1
6. Call hexadecimal to ASCII conversion.
7. Call data display to display the ASCII values on LCD.

Assembly language interfacing programming

RD BIT P2.5 ;RD
WR BIT P2.6 ;WR (start conversion)
INTR BIT P2.7 ;end-of-conversion
MYDATA EQU P1 ;P1.0-P1.7=D0-D7 of the ADC804
MOV P1,#0FFH ;make P1 » input
SETB INTR
BACK: CLR WR ;WR-0
SETB WR ;WR=1 L-to-H to start conversion
HERE: JB INTR,HERE ;wait for end of conversion
CLR RD ;conversion finished,enable RD
MOV A,MYDATA ;read the data
ACALL CONVERSION ;hex-to-ASCII conversion
ACALL DATA_DISPLAY ;display the data
SETB RD ;make RD=1 for next round
SJMP BACK
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
sbit RD = P2^5;
sbit WR = P2^6;
Sbit INTR = P2^7;
sfr MYDATA = P1;
void main{)
220 8051 Microcontroller

{
unsigned char value;
MYDATA = OxFF; //make PI and input
INTR = 1; //make INTR and input
RD = 1; //set RD high
WR = 1; //set WR high
while(1)
{
WR = 0; //send WR pulse
WR = 1; //L-to-H(Start Conversion)
while(INTR == 1); //wait for EOC
RD = 0; //send RD pulse
value = MYDATA; //read value
ConvertAndDisplay(value); //Display value on LCD
RD = 1;
}
}

5.3  LCD Interfacing

5.3.1 Introduction
LCD is finding widespread use replacing LEDs
• The declining prices of LCD
• The ability to display numbers, characters, and graphics
• Incorporation of a refreshing controller into the LCD, thereby relieving the CPU
of the task of refreshing the LCD
• Ease of programming for characters and graphics.

5.3.2 LCD Pins

The pins of alphanumeric LCD module which help in interfacing with the microcontroller
are given in table 6.2.1.
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 221

Table 5.3.2: LCD Commands Code

Pin Symbol I/O Descriptions

1 VSS - Ground
2 VCC - +5V power supply
3 VEE - Power supply to control contrast
4 RS I RS=0 to select command register,
RS=1 to select data register
5 R/W I R/W=0 for write,
R/W = 1 for read
*S
 end displayed 6 E I/O Enable used by the
information 7 DBO I/O The 8-bit data bus LCD to latch
or instruction information
8 DB1 I/O The 8-bit data bus
command codes to presented to
9 DB2 I/O The 8-bit data bus
the LCD its data bus
10 DB3 I/O The 8-bit data bus
*R
 ead the contents 11 DB4 I/O The 8-bit data bus
of the LCD's
12 DB5 I/O The 8-bit data bus
internal registers
13 DB6 I/O The 8-bit data bus
14 DB7 I/O The 8-bit data bus

5.3.3 LCD Commands

Table 5.3.1: LCD Commands Code
Code (Hex) Command to LCD Instruction
1 Clear display screen
2 Return home
4 Decrement cursor (shift cursor to left)
6 Increment cursor (shift cursor to right)
5 Shift display right
7 Shift display left
8 Display off, cursor off
A Display off, cursor on
C Display on, cursor off
E Display on, cursor blinking
F Display on, cursor blinking
10 Shift cursor position to left
222 8051 Microcontroller

14 Shift cursor position to right

18 Shift the entire display to the left
1C Shift the entire display to the right
80 Force cursor to beginning of 1st line
C0 Force cursor to beginning of 2nd line
38 2 lines and 5x7 matrix

5.3.4 LCD Timing for READ

tD=Data output delay time

D0-D7 Data
tD
E
R/W tAS tAH

RS
tAH = Hold time after E has
come down for both RS and
R/W = 10ns(minimum)
tAS = Setup time prior to E
(going high) for both RS and
R/W = 140ns(minimum)

Fig. 5.3.1: LCD Timing for READ

Note: Read requires an L-to-H pulse for the E pin

5.3.5 LCD Timing for WRITE

D0-D7 Data
tDSW = Data set up time = tH=Data Hold time
tH
195ns (minimum) = 10ns(minimum)
E tAS
tDSW
tPWH tAH
R/W
RS
tAH = Hold time after E has
come down for both RS and
R/W = 10ns(minimum)

tPWH = Enable pulse width

= 450ns (minimum)

tAS = Setup time prior to E

(going high) for both RS and
R/W = 140ns(minimum)

Fig. 5.3.2: LCD Timing for write

8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 223

Example 5.14:
Write the schematic, algorithm and a program to interface a alphanumeric
LCD to 8051 and to display ‘INDIA’

+5V
P1.0 D0 VCC
10K
LCD VEE
P1.7 D7 P0T

8051 RS R/W E VSS

P2.0
P2.1
P2.2

Fig. 5.3.3: LCD Interfacing with 8051

 ALGORITHM
1. Initialize the LCD using the lcdcmd subroutine.
2. Send the commands 38H, 0EH, 01H, 06H and 86H to PORT P1
3. Make RS = 0 & R/W = 0
4. Make enable Pin E=1 for a 1 ms.
5. Make enable Pin E=0
6. Return to calling program
 end the ASCII value ‘I’, ‘N’, ‘D’, ‘I’, ‘A’ to PORT P1 and call lcddata subroutine
7. S
with 250 ms delay.
8. Make RS = 1 & R/W = 0
9. Make enable Pin E=1 for a 1 ms.
10. Make enable Pin E=0
11. Return to calling program

Assembly language interfacing programming

To send any of the commands to the LCD, make pin RS=0. For data, make RS=1.
Then send a high-to-low pulse to the E pin to enable the internal latch of the LCD.
This is shown in the code below.
;calls a time delay before sending next data/command
;P1.0-P1.7 are connected to LCD data pins D0-D7
;P2.0 is connected to RS pin of LCD
224 8051 Microcontroller

;P2.1 is connected to R/W pin of LCD

;P2.2 is connected to E pin of LCD

ORG 00H
MOV A,#38H ;Initialize LCD 2 LINES, 5X7 MATRIX
ACALL COMNWRT ;call command subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#0EH ;display on, cursor on
ACALL COMNWRT ;call command subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#01 ;clear LCD
ACALL COMNWRT ;call command subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#06H ;shift cursor right
ACALL COMNWRT ;call command subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#84H ;cursor at line 1, pos. 4
ACALL COMNWRT ;call command subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#’I’ ;display letter I
ACALL DATAWRT ;call display subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#’N’ ;display letter N
ACALL DATAWRT ;call display subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#’D’ ;display letter D
ACALL DATAWRT ;call display subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#’I’ ;display letter I
ACALL DATAWRT ;call display subroutine
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
MOV A,#’A’ ;display letter A
ACALL DATAWRT ;call display subroutine
AGAIN: SJMP AGAIN ;stay here
COMNWRT: ;send command to LCD
MOV P1,A ;copy reg A to port 1
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 225

CLR P2.0 ;RS=0 for command

CLR P2.1 ;R/W=0 for write
SETB P2.2 ;E=1 for high pulse
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
CLR P2.2 ;E=0 for H-to-L pulse
RET
DATAWRT: ;write data to LCD
MOV P1,A ;copy reg A to port 1
SETB P2.0 ;RS=1 for data
CLR P2.1 ;R/W=0 for write
SETB P2.2 ;E=1 for high pulse
ACALL DELAY ;give LCD some time
CLR P2.2 ;E=0 for H-to-L pulse
RET
DELAY: MOV R3,#50 ;50 or higher for fast CPUs
HERE2: MOV R4,#255 ;R4 = 255
HERE: DJNZ R4,HERE ;stay until R4 becomes 0
DJNZ R3,HERE2
RET
END
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
sfr ldata=0x90; //P1=LCD data pins
sbit RS=P2^0; // Register Select
sbit RW=P2^1; // Read (1) & Write (0)
sbit E=P2^2; // LCD enable

void lcdmd(unsigned char i);

void lcddata(unsigned char i);
void delay(unsigned char i);

void main()
{
lcdcmd(0x38);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x0E);
226 8051 Microcontroller

delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x01);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x06);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x86);
delay(250);
lcddata(‘I’);
delay(250);
lcddata(‘N’);
delay(250);
lcddata(‘D’);
delay(250);
lcddata(‘I’);
delay(250);
lcddata(‘A’);
}
void lcdcmd(unsigned char value)
{
ldata = value; //put the value on the pins
RS=0;
RW=0;
E=1; //strobe the enable pin
delay(1);
E=0;
return;
}
void lcddata(unsigned char value)
{
ldata = value; //put the value on the pins
RS=1;
RW=0;
E=1; //strobe the enable pin
delay(1);
E=0;
return;
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i, j;
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 227

for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
Example 5.15:
Write the schematic, algorithm and a program to interface a alphanumeric
LCD to 8051 and to display ‘HELLO’

+5V
P1.0 D0 VCC
10K POT
LCD VEE
P1.7 D7
8051 RS R/W E VSS
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2

Fig. 5.3.4: LCD Interfacing with 8051

 ALGORITHM
1. Initialize the LCD using the lcdcmd subroutine.
2. Send the commands 38H, OEH, 01H, 06H and 86H to PORT P1
3. Make RS = 0 & R/W = 0
4. Make enable Pin E=1 for a 1 ms.
5. Make enable Pin E=0
6. Return to calling program
 end the ASCII value ‘H’, ‘E’, ‘L’, ‘L’, ‘O’ to PORT P1 and call lcddata subroutine
7. S
with 250 ms delay.
8. Make RS = 1 & R/W = 0
9. Make enable Pin E=1 for a 1 ms.
10. Make enable Pin E=0
11. Return to calling program
Assembly language interfacing programming
;Check busy flag before sending data, command to LCD
;p1=data pin
;P2.0 connected to RS pin
;P2.1 connected to R/W pin
228 8051 Microcontroller

;P2.2 connected to E pin

ORG 00H
MOV A,#38H ;initialize LCD 2 lines ,5x7 matrix
ACALL COMMAND ;issue command
MOV A,#0EH ;LCD on, cursor on
ACALL COMMAND ;issue command
MOV A,#01H ;clear LCD command
ACALL COMMAND ;issue command
MOV A,#06H ;shift cursor right
ACALL COMMAND ;issue command
MOV A,#86H ;cursor: line 1, pos. 6
ACALL COMMAND ;command subroutine

MOV A,#’H’ ;display letter H

ACALL DATA_DISPLAY
MOV A,#’E’ ;display letter E
ACALL DATA_DISPLAY
MOV A,#’L’ ;display letter L
ACALL DATA_DISPLAY
MOV A,#’L’ ;display letter L
ACALL DATA_DISPLAY
MOV A,#’O’ ;display letter O
ACALL DATA_DISPLAY

HERE:SJMP HERE ;STAY HERE

COMMAND:
ACALL READY ;is LCD ready?
MOV P1,A ;issue command code
CLR P2.0 ;RS=0 for command
CLR P2.1 ;R/W=0 to write to LCD
SETB P2.2 ;E=1 for H-to-L pulse
CLR P2.2 ;E=0,latch in
RET
DATA_DISPLAY:
ACALL READY ;is LCD ready?
MOV P1,A ;issue data
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 229

SETB P2.0 ;RS=1 for data

CLR P2.1 ;R/W =0 to write to LCD
SETB P2.2 ;E=1 for H-to-L pulse
CLR P2.2 ;E=0,latch in
RET
READY:
SETB P1.7 ;make P1.7 input port
CLR P2.0 ;RS=0 access command reg
SETB P2.1 ;R/W=1 read command reg
;read command reg and check busy flag
BACK:SETB P2.2 ;E=1 for H-to-L pulse
CLR P2.2 ;E=0 H-to-L pulse
JB P1.7,BACK ;stay until busy flag=0
RET
END

C language interfacing programming

#include <reg51.h>
sfr ldata=0x90; //P1=LCD data pins
sbit RS=P2^0; // Register Select
sbit RW=P2^1; // Read (1) & Write (0)
sbit E=P2^2; // LCD enable
void lcdmd(unsigned char i);
void lcddata(unsigned char i);
void delay(unsigned char i);
void main( )
{
lcdcmd(0x38);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x0E);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x01);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x06);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(0x86);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(‘H’);
230 8051 Microcontroller

delay(250);
lcdcmd(‘E’);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(‘L’);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(‘L’);
delay(250);
lcdcmd(‘O’);
}

void lcdcmd(unsigned char value)

{
ldata=value; //put the value on the pins
RS=0;
RW=0;
E=1; //strobe the enable pin
delay(1);
E=0;
return;
}
void lcddata(unsigned char value)
{
ldata=value; //put the value on the pins
RS=1;
RW=0;
E=1; //strobe the enable pin
delay(1);
E=0;
return;
}

void delay(unsigned int count)

{
unsigned int i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 231

5.4 Stepper Motor
5.4.1 Introduction
A

N
C O D
N
S

N Average
S North
A
O

C D
N
S

B
COM
Average N C
South S D
COM

B
Fig. 5.4.1 ROTOR Alignment Fig. 5.4.2: Stator Windings configuration
• A stepper motor translates electrical pulses into mechanical movements. Stepper
motors have a permanent magnet rotor called shaft surrounded by a stator.
• A stepper motor or step motor or stepping motor is a brushless DC electric
motor that divides a full rotation into a number of equal steps. The motor’s
position can then be commanded to move and hold at one of these steps.
The most common stepper motor has four stator windings that are paired with
center-tapped common as shown in figure. This type of stepper motor is commonly
referred to as a four-phase or unipolar stepper motor. The center tap allows a change
of current direction in each of two coils when a winding is grounded, thereby resulting
in a polarity change of the stator. Notice that while a conventional motor shaft runs
freely, the stepper motor shaft moves in fixed repeatable increment, which alone one
to move it to a precise position.
232 8051 Microcontroller

The direction of the rotation is dictated by the stator poles. The stator poles are
determined by the current sent through the wire coils. As the direction of the current
is changed, the polarity is also changed causing the reverse motion of the rotor. The
stepper motor has a total of 6 leads: 4 leads representing the four stator winding and
2 common for the center-tapped leads.
The figure explains the stepper motor control system.
To stepper motor
+5V
+5V supply
Unipolar Stepper
4.7k

4.7k

4.7k
4.7k

DS89C4x0 9 ULN2003 Motor

P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
8

Use one power supply for the

motor and ULN20003 and
another for the 8051
+5V

Fig. 5.4.3 Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

A stepper motor is brushless and synchronous motor which divides the complete
rotation into number of steps. Each stepper motor will have some fixed step angle and
motor rotates at this angle. The main principle of this circuit is to rotate the stepper
motor step wise at a particular step angle. The ULN2003A IC is used to drive stepper
motor as the controller cannot provide current required by the motor.
The circuit mainly consists of:
• 8051 micro controller  ULN2003A  Stepper Motor
The Motor is connected to the Port 2 of the microcontroller through a driver
IC. The ULN2003A is a current driver IC. It is used to drive the current of the
stepper motor as it requires more than 60mA current. It is an array of Darlington
pairs. It consists of seven pairs of Darlington arrays with common emitter. The IC
consists of 16 pins in which 7 are input pins, 7 are output pins and remaining are
VCC and Ground. The first four input pins are connected to the microcontroller. In
the same way, four output pins are connected to the stepper motor.
Stepper motor has 6 pins. In these six pins, 2 pins are connected to the
supply of 12V and the remaining are connected to the output of the stepper
motor. Stepper motor rotates at a given step angle. Each step in rotation is a
fraction of full cycle.
The stepper motors will have stator and rotor. Rotor has permanent
magnet and stator has coil. The basic stepper motor has 4 coils with 90
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 233

degrees rotation step. These four coils are activated in the cyclic order. The
figure shown gives the direction of rotation of the shaft of the stepper motor.
There are different methods to drive a stepper motor. Some of these are
explained below.
Full Step Drive (1.80/Step): In this method two coils are energized at a time. Thus,
here two opposite coils are excited at a time.
Half Step Drive (0.90/Step): In this method coils are energized alternatively.
Thus it rotates with half step angle. In this method, two coils can be energized
at a time or single coil can be energized. Thus it increases the number of
rotations per cycle.

Table 5.4.1: Full-Step: 4-Step Sequence

Winding Winding Winding Winding Counter-
Clockwise Step
A B C D Clockwise
1 1 0 0 1
2 1 1 0 0
3 0 1 1 0
4 0 0 1 1

Table 5.4.2: Half-Step: 8-Step Sequence

Winding Winding Winding Winding Counter-
Clockwise Step
A B C D Clockwise
1 1 0 0 1
2 1 0 0 0
3 1 1 0 0
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 1 0
6 0 0 1 0
7 0 0 1 1
8 0 0 0 1

Table 5.4.3: Wave drive 4-Step sequence

Winding Winding Winding Winding Counter-
Clockwise Step
A B C D Clockwise
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1

Stepper motor controller circuit advantages:

• It consumes less power.  It requires low operating voltage.
234 8051 Microcontroller

Stepper Motor Applications:

• Robotics  Dot matrix printers
• Mechatronics  Disk drives
• Position Control etc.

5.4.2 Stepper motor controller

Power Supply Microcontroller AT89c51 Stepper Motor

Control Switch

Fig. 5.4.4: Block diagram of a stepper motor controller system.

A stepper motor controller (SMC) is an interfacing circuit which is used in
between the stepper motor & the load, which is to be controlled. A SMC based 8051
microcontroller to control the rotation of a DC stepper motor in clockwise and anti-
clockwise directions is shown in the figure 6.65. The controller is simple and easy
to construct, and can be used in many applications including machine control and
robotics for controlling the axial rotation.

Example 5.16:
Sketch the schematic for interfacing a stepper motor to 8051
Solution:

To stepper motor
+5V
+5V supply
Unipolar Stepper
4.7k

4.7k

4.7k
4.7k

DS89C4x0 9 ULN2003 Motor

P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
8

Use one power supply for

the motor and ULN20003
and another for the 8051
+5V
Fig. 5.4.5: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 235

Example 5.17:
Write the schematic, algorithm and a program to interface a stepper motor
to 8051 and to rotate the motor in clock wise direction using normal 4 step
sequence
Solution:
To stepper motor
+5V
+5V supply
Unipolar Stepper

4.7k

4.7k

4.7k
4.7k
DS89C4x0 9 ULN2003 Motor
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
8

Use one power supply for

the motor and ULN20003
and another for the 8051
+5V

Fig. 5.4.6: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

Table 5.4.4: Full-Step: 4-Step Sequence
Counter-
Clockwise Step Winding A Winding B Winding C Winding D
Clockwise
1 1 0 0 1
2 1 1 0 0
3 0 1 1 0
4 0 0 1 1
• To generate the full-step 4-step sequence, the initial values to be used for
clockwise are 66H, 33H, 99H and CCH.
• To generate the full-step 4-step sequence, the initial values to be used for
counter-clockwise are CCH, 99H, 33H and 66H.

 Algorithm
1. For clockwise direction, load the sequence 66H into P1
2. Call 100 msdelay
3. Load the sequence 33H into P1
4. Call 100 msdelay
5. Load the sequence 99H into P1
6. Call 100 msdelay
7. Load the sequence CCH into P1
8. Call 100 msdelay
9. Repeat from step 1
236 8051 Microcontroller

Assembly language interfacing programming

Method 1 Method 2
ORG 00H ORG 00H
BACK: MOV A,#66H BACK: MOV P1, #66H
MOV P1,A ACALL DELAY
RR A MOV P1, #33H
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, #99H
SJMP BACK ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, #CCH
DELAY:MOV R0,#255 ACALL DELAY
UP1: MOV R1,#255 SJMP BACK
UP2: DJNZ R1,UP2 DELAY: MOV R0,#255
DJNZ R0,UP1 UP1: MOV R1,#255
RET UP2: DJNZ R1,UP2
END DJNZ R0,UP1
RET
END
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int i);
void main ( )
{
while (1)
{
P1 = 0x66;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x33H;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x99;
delay (100);
P1 = 0xCC;
delay (100);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsignedint i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 237

Example 5.18:
Write the schematic, algorithm and a program to interface a stepper motor to 8051
and to rotate the motor in anti-clock wise direction using wave drive sequence
Solution: +5V To stepper motor
+5V
supply
Unipolar Stepper

4.7k

4.7k

4.7k
DS89C4x0 4.7k 9 ULN2003 Motor
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
8

Use one power supply for

the motor and ULN20003
and another for the 8051
+5V
Fig. 5.4.7: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

Table 5.4.5: Wave drive 4-Step sequence

Counter-
Clockwise Step Winding A Winding B Winding C Winding D
Clockwise
1 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0
4 0 0 0 1

In wave-drive 4-step sequence, the initial values to be used for clockwise are 8H,
4H, 2H and 1H.
In wave-drive 4-step sequence, the initial values to be used for counter-clockwise are
1H, 2H, 4H and 8H.

 Algorithm
1. Port 1 is used as output port
2. Load the sequence 01H into P1
3. Call 100 msdelay
4. Load the sequence 02H into P1
5. Call 100 msdelay
238 8051 Microcontroller

6. Load the sequence 04H into P1

7. Call 100 msdelay
8. Load the sequence 08H into P1
9. Call 100 msdelay
10. Repeat from step 2

Assembly language interfacing programming

Method 1 Method 2
ORG 00H ORG 00H
BACK: MOV A,#01H BACK: MOV P1, #01H
MOV P1,A ACALL DELAY
RL A MOV P1, #02H
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, #04H
SJMP BACK ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, #08H
DELAY: MOV R0,#255 ACALL DELAY
UP1: MOV R1,#255
UP2: DJNZ R1,UP2 SJMP BACK
DJNZ R0,UP1
RET DELAY: MOV R0,#255
END UP1: MOV R1,#255
UP2: DJNZ R1,UP2
DJNZ R0,UP1
RET
END

C Program
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int i);
void main ( )
{
while (1)
{
P1=0x11;
delay (100);
P1=0x22;
delay (100);
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 239

P1=0x44;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x88;
delay (100);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
Example 5.19:
A switch is connected to pin P2.7. Write a C program to monitor the
status of SW and perform the following:
i. If SW = 0, the stepper motor moves clockwise.
ii. If SW = 1, the stepper motor moves counterclockwise.
Solution:

• To generate the full-step 4-step sequence, the initial values to be used for
clockwise are 66H, 33H, 99H and CCH.
• To generate the full-step 4-step sequence, the initial values to be used for
counter-clockwise are CCH, 99H, 33H and 66H.
+5
+12V
ILQ74 +12 Unipolar Stepper
470
470
470
470

8051 1 Opto 10 ULN2003 Motor

1K
P1.0 2 16
3 15
4 14 1K
P1.1
6 13 1K
P1.2 5 12
8 11
10 1K
P1.3 7
P2.7 9
9

The optoisolator
Use one power supply
provides additional
for the motor and
protection of the 8051
ULN2003 and another
+12V
for the 8051

Fig. 5.4.8: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

240 8051 Microcontroller

 Algorithm
1. If SW = 0, rotate the motor in clockwise direction
2. Load the sequence 66H into P1
3. Call 100 msdelay
4. Load the sequence 33H into P1
5. Call 100 msdelay
6. Load the sequence 99H into P1
7. Call 100 msdelay
8. Load the sequence CCH into P1
9. Call 100 msdelay
10. Else (i.e. if SW =1)
11. Rotate motor in counterclockwise direction i.e. load the sequence CCH into P1
12. Call 100 msdelay
13. Load the sequence 99H into P1
14. Call 100 msdelay
15. Load the sequence 33H into P1
16. Call 100 msdelay
17. Load the sequence 66H into P1
18. Call 100 msdelay
19. Repeat from step 1

Assembly language interfacing programming

Method 1 Method 2
ORG 00H ORG 00H
SETB P2.7 SETB P2.7
MOV A, #66H
NEXT: JNB P2.7, CLOCKWISE BACK: JNB P2.7, CLOCKWISE
RL A
MOV P1, A MOV P1, #CCH
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
SJMP NEXT MOV P1, #99H
CLOCKWISE: RR A ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, A MOV P1, #33H
ACALL DELAY ACALL DELAY
SJMP NEXT MOV P1, #66H
DELAY: MOV R0, #255 ACALL DELAY
UP2: MOV R1, #255 SJMP BACK
Continued...
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 241

UP1: DJNZ R1, UP1 CLOCKWISE:

DJNZ R0, UP2 MOV P1, #66H
RET ACALL DELAY
END MOV P1, #33H
ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, #99H
ACALL DELAY
MOV P1, #CCH
ACALL DELAY

SJMP BACK

DELAY: MOV R0,#255

UP1: MOV R1,#255
UP2: DJNZ R1,UP2
DJNZ R0,UP1
RET
END
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
sbit SW=P2^7;
void delay(unsigned int i);
void main ( )
{
SW= 1;
while (1)
{
if (SW==0)
{
P1 = 0x66;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x33;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x99;
delay (100);
P1 = 0xCC;
delay (100);
}
else
242 8051 Microcontroller

{
P1 = 0xCC;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x99;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x33;
delay (100);
P1 = 0x66;
delay (100);
}
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsignedint i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}

Example 5.20:
Write a program to rotate a motor 80o in the clockwise direction. The
motor has a step angle of 2o. Use the 4-step sequence.
Solution:
+5
+12V
ILQ74 +12 Unipolar Stepper
470
470
470
470

8051 1 Opto 10 ULN2003 Motor

1K
P1.0 2 16
3 15
4 14 1K
P1.1
6 13 1K
P1.2 5 12
8 11
10 1K
P1.3 7
P2.7 9
9

The optoisolator
Use one power supply
provides additional
for the motor and
protection of the 8051
ULN2003 and another
+12V
for the 8051

Fig. 5.4.9: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 243

Number of steps to rotate the motor for 80o is

80o 80o
= o = 40 Steps
Step Angle 2

 Algorithm
1. Initialize a counter with 40 steps
2. Load the sequence 66H into P1
3. Call delay
4. For clockwise direction rotate the phase sequence right
5. Decrement counter (R0) and repeat from step 1 until counter is zero
6. If counter is zero i.e. R0=0, Stop.

Assembly language interfacing programming

ORG 00H
MOV A, #66H
MOV R0, #40
UP: RR A
MOV P1, A
ACALL DELAY
DJNZ R0, UP
DELAY: MOV R2, #255
UP2: MOV R1, #255
UP1: DJNZ R1, UP1
DNJZ R2, UP2
RET
END
Clanguage interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int i);
void main ( )
{
unsigned char counter, sequence, i;
counter=40;
sequence=0x66;
for(i=0; i<counter: i++)
{
P1=sequence;
sequence=sequence>>1;
delay(100);
}
244 8051 Microcontroller

while (1);
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsignedint i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
Example 5.21:
Write a program to rotate a motor 80o in the clockwise direction. The
motor has a step angle of 2o. Use the 4-step sequence.
Solution:

 Algorithm
1. Initialize a counter with 40 steps
2. Load the sequence 66H into P1
3. Call delay
4. For clockwise direction rotate the phase sequence right
5. Decrement counter (R0) and repeat from step 1 until counter is zero
6. If counter is zero i.e. R0=0, Stop.
+5
+12V
ILQ74 +12 Unipolar Stepper
470
470
470
470

8051 1 Opto 10 ULN2003 Motor

1K
P1.0 2 16
3 15
4 14 1K
P1.1
6 13 1K
P1.2 5 12
8 11
10 1K
P1.3 7
P2.7 9
9

The optoisolator
Use one power supply
provides additional
for the motor and
protection of the 8051
ULN2003 and another
+12V
for the 8051

Fig. 5.4.10: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

Assembly language interfacing programming
ORG 00H
MOV A, #66H
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 245

MOV R0, #40

UP: RR A
MOV P1, A
ACALL DELAY
DJNZ R0, UP
SJMP EXIT
DELAY: MOV R2, #255
UP2: MOV R1, #255
UP1: DJNZ R1, UP1
DJNZ R2, UP2
RET
EXIT:
END
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int i);
void main ( )
{
unsigned char counter, sequence, i;
counter=40;
sequence=0x66;
for(i=0; i<counter: i++);
{
P1=sequence;
sequence=sequence>>1;
delay(100);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsignedint i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
Example 5.21:
Write a program to rotate the stepper motor continuously
i.   Clockwise using the wave drive 4-step sequence
ii. Clockwise using the half-step 8-step sequence.
Use the sequence values saved in the program ROM location.
246 8051 Microcontroller

Solution:
+5
+12V
ILQ74 +12 Unipolar Stepper
470
470
470
470
8051 1 Opto 10 ULN2003 Motor
1K
P1.0 2 16
3 15
4 14 1K
P1.1
6 13 1K
P1.2 5 12
8 11
10 1K
P1.3 7
P2.7 9
9

The optoisolator
Use one power supply
provides additional
for the motor and
protection of the 8051
ULN2003 and another
+12V
for the 8051

Fig. 5.4.11: Circuit diagram of stepper motor control system

i. Clockwise using the wave drive 4-step sequence
 Algorithm
1. Initialize a counter R0 for 044 steps
2. Initialize the starting address of the sequence table
3. Get value from the sequence table and output to port P1
4. Increment the DPTR pointer
5. Decrement counter (R0) and repeat from step 3 until counter is zero
6. If counter is zero i.e. R0=0, repeat from step 1.
Assembly language interfacing programming
ORG 00H
UP: MOV R0, #04
MOV DPTR, #0200H
REPEAT: CLR A
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
MOV P1, A
ACALL DELAY
INC DPTR
DJNZ R0, REPEAT
SJMP UP
DELAY: MOV R2, #255
UP2: MOV R1, #255
8051 Interrupts and Interfacing Applications 247

UP1: DJNZ R1, UP1

DJNZ R2, UP2
RET

ORG 0200H
DB 8,4,2,1
END
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
void main ( )

{
code unsigned char sequence[]={08,04,02,01};
unsigned char i;
while(1)
{
for(i=0;i<4;i++)
{ P1=sequence[i];
delay(100);
}
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsignedint i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
ii. Clockwise using the half-step 8-step sequence.
 Algorithm
1. Initialize a counter R0 for 08 steps
2. Initialize the starting address of the sequence table
3. Get value from the sequence table and output to port P1
4. Increment the DPTR pointer
5. Decrement counter (R0) and repeat from step 3 until counter is zero
6. If counter is zero i.e. R0=0, repeat from step 1.
Assembly language interfacing programming
ORG 00H
UP: MOV R0, #08
248 8051 Microcontroller

MOV DPTR, #0100H

REPEAT: CLR A
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
MOV P1, A
ACALL DELAY
INC DPTR
DJNZ R0, REPEAT
SJMP UP

DELAY: MOV R2, #255

UP2: MOV R1, #255
UP1: DJNZ R1, UP1
DJNZ R2, UP2
RET

ORG 0100H
DB 09, 08, 0CH, 04, 06,02,03,01
END
C language interfacing programming
#include <reg51.h>
void main ( )
{
code unsigned char sequence[]={09,08,0x0C,04,06,02,03,01};
unsigned char i;
while(1)
{
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{ P1=sequence[i];
delay(100);
}
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i, j;
for(i=0;i<count;i++)
for(j=0;j<1275;j++);
}
 8051 Programs

8051 Programs
1. Show the stack contents, SP contents and contents of any register affected
after each step of the following sequence of operation.
Solution:
PROGRAM SP STACK CONTENT REGISTER CONTENT
MOV SP,#70H 70H - -
MOV R5,#30H 70H - R5=30H
MOV A,#44H 70H - A=44H
ADD A,R5 70H - A=74H
MOV R4,A 70H - R4=74H
PUSH 4 71H 74H R4=74H
PUSH 5 72H 30H R5=30H
POP 4 71H - R4=30H
2. Write a program to logically OR the contents of ports P1 & P2 and put the
result in external RAM location.
Solution:
ORG 00H
MOV DPTR,#0100H
MPV P1,#0FFH
MOV P2,#0FFH
MOV A,P1
MOV R0,P1
ORL A,R2

249
250 8051 Microcontroller

MOVX @DPTR,A
END
3. Find the sum of the values 79h,F5h & E2h; put the sum in registers R0
(low byte) & R5 (higher byte).
Solution:
ORG 00H
MOV R0,#00H
MOV A,#79H
ADD A,#0F5H
ADDC A,#0E2H
MOV R5,A
JNC NOCARRY
INC R0
NOCARRY: END

4. Write a program to add 10 BCD numbers stored in successive M/M locations

from 20H in internal RAM locations & store the result at address 40H &
41H.
Solution:
ORG 00H
MOV R0,#20H
MOV R2,#0AH
MOV R3,#00H
MOV A,@R0
UP: INC R0
ADDC A,@R0
DA A
JNC NOCARRY
INC R3
DJNZ R2,UP
MOV 41H,A
NOCARRY: MOV 40H,R3
END
8051 Programs 251

5. Find the status of carry flag after the following code sequence.
Solution:
i) CLR A ii) CLR C iii) CLR C
ADD A,#0FFH JNC OVER JC OVER
JNC OVER CPL C SETB C CPL C
OVER: OVER: OVER:

i) CLR A ii) CLR C iii) CLR C

ADD A,#0FFH JNC OVER JC OVER
JNC OVER CPL C SETB C CPL C
OVER: OVER: OVER:
carry=0 carry=0 carry=1

6. Write an ALP to add two input data of 16-bit result in 4 distinct addressing
modes.

Solution:
Immediate Direct Register Indirect Addressing
ORG 00H ORG 00H ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV A,#0FFH MOV A,40H MOV R0,#0FFH MOV R0,#40H
ADD A,#0FFH ADD A,41H MOVR1,#0FFH MOV R1,#51H
END MOV 51H,A MOV A,R0 MOV A,@R0
JNC NOCARRY ADD A,R1 INC R0
INCR2 MOV R3,A ADD A,@R0
NOCARRY: MOV 50H,R2 JNC NOCARRY MOV @R1,A
END INCR2 JNC NOCARRY
NOCARRY:END INC R2
NOCARRY: MOV A,R2
DEC R1
MOV @R1,A
END
252 8051 Microcontroller

7. Write a program to put the number 34H in registers R4, R5, R6 & R7 using
different addressing modes.
Solution:
Immediate Direct Register Indirect Addressing
ORG 00H ORG 00H ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV R4,#34H MOV 40H,#34H MOV A,#34H MOV R0,#40H
MOV R5,#34H MOV R4, 40H MOV R4,A MOV 04H,@R0
MOV R6,#34H MOV R5, 40H MOV R5,A MOV 05H,@R0
MOV R7,#34H MOV R6, 40H MOV R6,A MOV 06H,@R0
END MOV R7, 40H MOV R7,A MOV 07H,@R0
END END END
8. Write an ALP in 8051 to perform the following operation: Z = (X1 + Y1)
* (X2 + Y2) where, X1, X2, Y1 and Y2 are the 8-bit hexadecimal numbers
stored in the RAM locations. Write a subroutine for the addition and
assume that each addition result with 8 bit number.
Solution:
 et X 1,Y 1,X2 & Y2 are stored at memory locations 30H, 31H, 32H and 33H,
L
respectively and results will be stored at memory locations 34H and 35H.
ORG 00H
MOV R0, #30H
ACALL ADDITION
MOVR1, A
INC R0
ACALL ADDITION
MOV B, R1
MUL AB
MOV 34H, A
MOV 35H, B
SJMP EXIT
ADDITION:
MOV A,@R0
INC R0
ADD A,@R0
RET
EXIT:
END
8051 Programs 253

9. Write an ALP to clear both R0 & R1 of Bank 1 & Bank 2 without using their
direct address.
Solution:
ORG 00H
SETB PSW.3
CLR PSW.4
MOV R0,#00H
MOVR1,#00H
CLR PSW.3
SETB PSW.4
MOV R0,#00H
MOVR1,#00H
END
10. Write an ALP to clear R0 of bank 1 & bank 3 without using its address.
Solution:
ORG 00H
SETB PSW.3
CLR PSW.4
MOV R0,#00H
SETB PSW.3
SETB PSW.4
MOV R0,#00H
END
11. Write a program to set the carry flag to 1, if the number in reg. A is even
and reset the carry flag to 0, if the number in reg. A is ODD. Use the
assembly language of 8051.
Method-1 Method-2 Method-3
ORG 00H ORG 00H ORG 00H
MOV A,30H MOV A,30H MOV A,30H
RRC A RRC A ADD A,#00H
JNC NEXT JC NEXT JB PSW.0, NEXT
SETB C CLR C CLR C
SJMP EXIT SJMP EXIT SJMP EXIT
NEXT: CLR C NEXT: SETB C NEXT: SETB C
EXIT: END EXIT: END EXIT: END

254 8051 Microcontroller

12. Write the result statement after execution of each instruction.

Solution:
The internal RAM address of SP is 81H i.e., Stack pointer is loaded with address 30H
(SP=30H)
Program Register Result
MOV 81H,#30H0ACH 30H 30H
MOV R0,#0ACH R0 0ACH
PUSH 00H SP& 31H 31H & 0ACH
PUSH 00H SP & 32H 32H & 0ACH
POP 01H R1 0ACH
POP 80H P0 0ACH
MOV A,#0FFH A FFH
XRL A,80H A 53H
POP 82H P2(82H) 0ACH
POP 83H P3(83H) 0ACH
MOVX @DPTR,A ADDRESS 53H
13. What are the final numbers in A, B and OV flag after the execution?
Solution:
MOV A,#7BH
MOV 0F0H,#02H 0F0H IS A. ADDRESS OF B REGISTER. ie., MOV B,#02H
MUL AB RESULT =00F6H. ie., B=00H & A=F6H
MOV B,#0FEH B=FEH
MUL AB A=F6H & B=FEH. RESULT IS F414. ie., A=14H & B=F4H. OV=1
END
Result: A=14H, B=F4H & OV=1.

14. Name the addressing modes of the following instructions.

i) MOVC A,@A+DPTR ii) MUL AB iii) MOV B,#0FFH iv) SUBB A,45H
Solution:
Instructions Addressing Mode
MOVC A,@A+DPTR INDEXED
MUL AB REGISTER
MOV B,#0FFH IMMEDIATE
SUBB A,45H DIRECT

8051 Programs 255

15. Write a C-program to toggle all bits of P0 & P2 continuously with 250
msec delay. Use inverting operator.
Solution:
#include<reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
void main()
{
P0=0x55;
P2=0x55;
while(1)
{
P0= P0;
P2= P2;
delay(250);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for(i=0;ijcount;i++)
for(j = 0;ji1275;j ++);
}

16. A switch (sw) is connected to P2.0 port pin. Write a C-program to send
out the values 44H serially one bit at a time via P1.0,depending upon the
switch condition: when SW=0; LSB should go out first, when SW=1; MSB
should go out first.
Solution:
#include<reg51.h>
sbit Pin0=P1 ^0;
sbitALSB = ACC^0;
sbitAMSB = ACC^7;
sbitSW = P 2^0;
voidmain( )
256 8051 Microcontroller

{
unsigned char mydata = 0x44;
unsigned char i;
ACC = mydata;
if (SW ==0)
{
for (i = 0; i < 8; i + +)
{
pin = ALSB;
ACC = ACC>> 1;
}
}
else
{
for (i = 0; i < 8; i + +)
{
pin = AMSB;
ACC = ACC << 1;
}
}
}
18. Write an 8051 C-program to toggle all the bits of P1, P2 & P0 continuously
with a 250 msec delay. Use SFR keyword to declare the port address.
Solution:
sfr P0=0x80;
sfr P1=0x90;
sfr P2=0xA0;
void delay(unsigned int);
void main()
{
while(1)
{
P0=0x55;
P1 = 0x55;
8051 Programs 257

P2=0x55;
delay(250);
P0=0xAA;
P1 = 0xAA;
P2=0xAA;
delay(250);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for(i=0;iicount;i++)
for(j = 0;ji1275;j ++);
}

19. Write an 8051 C-program to convert a given hex-data 0FFH into its
equivalent decimal data and display the result digits on P0, P1 & P2.
Solution:
#include<reg51.h>
void main()
{
unsigned char x, bindata, dl, dm, dh;
bindata=0xFF;
x=bindata/10;
dl=bindata%10;
dm=x%10;
dh=x/10;
P0=dl;
P1=dm;
P2=dh;
}

20. Write a C-program in 8051 to convert packed BCD 0x39 to ASCII and display
the bytes on P1 & P2.
258 8051 Microcontroller

Solution:
#include<reg51.h>
void main()
{
unsigned char x,y,z;
unsigned char mydata=0x39;
x=mydata & 0x0F;
P1=x | 0x30;
y = mydata & 0xP0;
y = y » 4;
P2 = y | 0x30;
}

21. Explain with an example, bit-wise logical operator for 8051-C.

Solution:
A B AND OR EX-OR INVERTER (B)
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 -
1 1 1 1 0 -
void main()
{
P0=0x55&0x0F;
P1 = 0x04| 0x68;
P2 = 0x54^0x78;
P3 = ~0x55;
P1 = 0x9A » 4;
P2 = 0x06 « 4;
}
22. Write an 8051 c-program to toggle the bit of P1 ports continuously with a
250 msec delay.
Solution:
#include<reg51.h>
void delay(unsigned int);
8051 Programs 259

void main()
{
while(1)
{
P1 = 0x55;
delay(250);
P1 = 0xAA;
delay(250);
}
}
void delay(unsigned int count)
{
unsigned int i,j;
for(i=0;ijcount;i++)
for(j = 0;ji1275;j ++);
}